Quarterlytics / Technology / Semiconductors / Smart Global

Smart Global

sgh · ASX Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker sgh
Exchange ASX
Sector Technology
Industry Semiconductors
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2016 Annual Report · Smart Global
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual Report 
2016

Slater and 
Gordon is the  
leading provider 
of consumer  
legal services  
in Australia 
and the UK

Contents

1 

2 

4 

5 

6 

8 

10 

11 

Highlights

Chair and Group Managing Director’s Report

 Overview

Strategy

People and Culture

Social Responsibility

 Board of Directors

Operating and Financial Review

20  Financial Statements

21  Directors’ Report

49 

50 

51 

52 

53 

 Auditor’s Independence Declaration

 Consolidated Statement of Profit or  
Loss and Other Comprehensive Income

 Consolidated Statement  
of Financial Position

 Consolidated Statement  
of Changes in Equity

 Consolidated Statement  
of Cash Flows

54  Notes to the Financial Statements

96 

 Slater and Gordon Limited  
Directors’ Declaration

97 

Independent Auditor’s Report

99  Additional ASX Information

100  Corporate Directory

The images in this report feature Slater and Gordon 
Ringwood (Australia) office staff.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016Highlights

Results for the year

Total revenue 

EBITDAW 1 

EBITDAW – normalised2

Net (loss)/profit after tax 

Net (loss)/profit after tax – normalised3

Net operating cash flow

Gross operating cash flow – normalised4

2016 
A$m

2015 
A$m

908.2

598.2

(49.3)

36.6

(1,017.6)

(48.7)

(104.2)

(57.6)

92.6

69.3

62.4

39.1

40.8

56.0

1.    EBITDAW is defined as earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation 

and movement in work in progress and is presented prior to non- cash 
impairment. 

2.   Normalised for AASB-3 adjustments, additional debtor/disbursement 

provisioning and non-recurring restructuring costs.

3.   Normalised for AASB-3 adjustments, goodwill impairment, additional debtor/

disbursement provisioning, non-recurring restructuring costs, finance costs and 
tax impact of normalisations.

4.  Gross operating cash flow (GOCF) is defined as net cash (utilised)/provided by 
operating activities before interest received, borrowing costs paid, income tax 
paid and payments to former owners. GOCF has been normalised for non-
recurring restructuring payments to suppliers.

EBITDAW, EBITDAW – normalised, gross operating cash flow – normalised 
and net (loss)/profit after tax – normalised balances presented in this report are 
unaudited non-IFRS measures that, in the opinion of the Directors, are useful in 
understanding and appraising the Company’s performance.

Key achievements

+  Slater and Gordon celebrates 

80 years of continuous 
operations

+  Service provided to 395,000 

clients across Australia  
and the UK

+  Improved financial reporting

+  Slater and Gordon lawyers 
brand achieves 28% brand 
awareness in the UK

Slater and Gordon Limited  1

Annual Report 2016 
Chair and Group Managing Director’s Report

a disproportionately higher cost base 
in Slater and Gordon Lawyers UK (SGL 
UK), lower than anticipated road traffic 
accident and noise induced hearing 
loss resolutions in SGS, and lastly the 
impact of a range of significant non-
recurring restructuring costs. 

The recovery in second half 
performance is evident in the 
improvement in Group EBITDAW1  
from a first half loss of $58.3 million  
to a second half profit of $9.0 million.

Net operating cash outflow of  
$104.2 million for the full year was 
driven by the UK underperformance 
along with payments to external 
advisers in relation to the ASIC 
review, AASB–15 implementation and 
restructuring costs in relation to the 
UK operations and the Group’s finance 
facilities. Gross operating cash flow 
(GOCF) improved materially in H2 
FY16 to an outflow of $17.2 million  
(H1 FY16: outflow of $61.1 million). The 
Company recognises that significant 
improvement is still required to 
restore cash flow; however, the trend 
is positive with H2 GOCF just over 
breakeven when normalising non-
recurring restructuring payments. 

The Directors have not declared a 
dividend in respect of the year ended  
30 June 2016. 

In May we announced the successful 
amendment of the Group’s finance 
facilities. The limits and maturity 
profile of the amended facilities are 
substantially the same as the previous 
facilities providing us with the time and 
flexibility to put in place initiatives to 
improve the profitability of the business 
and reduce debt. Our focus in the 2017 
financial year will be on achieving  
these objectives.

Australian Operations
The Australian business delivered 
a strong fee and services revenue 
performance in FY16 despite a 
challenging operating environment 
with increased activity by competitors 
and the ongoing impact of legislative 
change in Queensland. A solid result 
from the Personal Injury Law (PIL)  

John Skippen
Chair

Slater and Gordon’s results for the 
financial year ended 30 June 2016 
were disappointing and well below 
expectations. As announced in 
February 2016, a range of performance 
improvement initiatives were put in 
place in the second half of the year 
to improve profitability and cash 
performance across the business. 
These initiatives are on track in terms 
of implementation and delivery 
of benefits, but there is still more 
work to do. The second half results 
demonstrate the positive impact the 
activity to date has had on financial 
performance and we are confident that 
we have the strategy and people in 
place to restore the performance  
of the Group.

Results
Total revenue of $908.2 million did not 
translate meaningfully to the earnings 
line with a reported net loss after tax 
of $1,017.6 million. The result was 
heavily impacted by an $879.5 million 
impairment charge against the carrying 
value of goodwill, relating mainly 
to the $814.2 million write-down of 
goodwill in Slater Gordon Solutions 
(SGS), underperformance in the UK 
operations and an adverse movement in 
work in progress (WIP) of $41.3 million. 

The impairment charge was 
disappointing but necessary due to 
both the poorer than expected UK 
performance to date, and the increased 
risk associated with potential UK 
legislative change. There are several 
reasons for the UK underperformance 
including lower case resolutions from 

1.   EBITDAW, EBITDAW – normalised, gross operating cash flow – normalised and net 
(loss)/profit after tax – normalised balances presented in this report are unaudited  
non-IFRS measures that, in the opinion of the Directors, are useful in understanding  
and appraising the Company’s performance.

2  Slater and Gordon Limited

business was supplemented by strong 
organic growth in the family law and 
business and specialised litigation 
practices. Pleasingly, results from 
recent independent research measuring  
client satisfaction showed increasing 
client satisfaction levels in 2016.
A review of our operations across 
the UK and Australia identified more 
opportunity to improve the Australian 
business, so operational effectiveness 
initiatives will be rolled out over the 
2017 financial year.

UK Operations
In the UK, performance in the first 
half of FY16 was significantly below 
expectations and a performance 
improvement program was 
commenced in the second half.  
The initial activity involves reorganising 
our legal services business to service 
three key client areas – fast track 
personal injury, serious and specialised 
personal injury, and general law. Our 
structures, processes and technology 
will be optimised to ensure we are 
able to provide world-class services 
efficiently and profitably in each of 
these areas. This has involved ceasing 
operations in some locations and re-
sizing the workforce. This component 
of the performance improvement 
program will be substantially 
completed by early 2017. 

In November the ‘Autumn 2015 
Chancellor’s Statement’ included 
proposals that would limit the rights 
of people in the UK with lower 
value personal injury claims, if the 
proposals were implemented. Slater 
and Gordon will participate in the 
consultation process foreshadowed 
by the Ministry of Justice and also join 
with UK professional organisations and 
advocacy groups to oppose the changes 
proposed in the former Chancellor’s 
Autumn Statement. The Company 
believes that the proposed changes, 
if implemented, will bring about a 
reduction in the rights of people in  
the UK to access fair compensation 
through the legal system. 

It is not clear what the impact of 
Brexit will be on either the announced 
proposals or the UK economy, 
although the outcome of the Brexit 
referendum itself is not likely to have 
any material adverse impact on the 
local performance of the UK operations 
of the Company. 

Annual Report 2016Board and Senior 
Management Changes 
There has been a significant amount  
of change across the Slater and  
Gordon Group aimed at improving  
the performance and governance  
of a now much larger entity. 

In December we welcomed James M. 
Millar to the Board as a Non-Executive 
Director and Chair of the Audit, 
Compliance and Risk Management 
Committee. James brings a wealth  
of experience to Slater and Gordon  
and will be a key part of our program  
to build greater capacity and 
confidence in our audit process. 

Tom Brown has been appointed to 
the Slater and Gordon Board as a 
Non-Executive Director and Chair 
of the Remuneration Committee, 
commencing 1 September 2016. Tom  
is one of Australia’s most senior human 
resources executives with extensive 
experience in global listed companies 
and over 20 years board level 
experience across multiple industrial 
sectors. We very much look forward  
to Tom’s contribution heading into  
the new financial year.

Erica Lane and Ian Court will retire  
as Non-Executive Directors effective  
30 August 2016. We would like to thank 
Erica and Ian for their contribution to 
the Board over the past eight and nine 
years respectively and wish them every 
success for the future.

Ken Fowlie has chosen to step down 
from his position as an Executive 
Director effective 30 August 2016.  
Ken and the Board believe that at this 
point in time his full attention should  
be devoted to his role as Chief Executive 
Officer UK. We also thank Ken for his 
significant contribution to the Board 
over the past 13 years.

A process to supplement the Board 
with an additional Non-Executive 
Director continues and we will update 
the market in due course.

We also bolstered our senior 
management team during the year 
with the appointment of Group Chief 
Financial Officer, Bryce Houghton, and 
Hayden Stephens as CEO, Australia. 
Bryce has extensive CFO experience 
and has already made significant 
improvements to our finance function. 

Hayden has over 20 years’ experience 
in legal services and is very capable 
of undertaking the change program 
underway to ensure we make the most 
of the opportunity available to us in 
Australia having built the most well-
known brand for consumer  
legal services.

Delivering for our Clients
It is important to remember that 
despite a poor financial performance 
in 2016, we have continued to deliver 
a great service and some exceptional 
outcomes for over 395,000 clients 
across Australia and the UK. 

In Australia, service highlights included:

•   securing a significant settlement for 
a man injured in a head-on collision 
with a truck, who suffered a major 
head injury, permanently restricting 
his mobility and ability to work; 

•  successfully representing a young 
man who suffered severe burns to 
over 60% of his body while attending 
a friend’s birthday celebrations. 
We were able to obtain a significant 
settlement to assist our client to 
obtain the best available medical 
treatment as he undergoes  
extensive and repeated surgical 
procedures; and

•   signing an appeal launched by one 
of Australia’s largest residential 
builders against a couple forced  
to live in a substandard house for  
the past six years.

In the UK, service highlights included:

•   exposing serious failings in medical 

care that led to a mother’s death, and 
successfully representing her family 
in a clinical negligence case against 
the hospital responsible; 

•   successfully representing a police 
officer who was the victim of racial 
discrimination; and 

•   securing a significant settlement  
to pay for the full-time care of a 
teenage boy who suffered devastating 
injuries after being knocked off his 
bike by a car.

Successful outcomes like these make 
a difference to our clients’ lives and 
the feedback provided by our clients is 
testament to the quality of service we 
provide. It pleases us immensely to see 
words like professionalism, knowledge 
and dedication consistently used in 

Andrew Grech 
Group Managing Director

the feedback we receive from our 
clients. Our work can and does make a 
difference and our purpose remains as 
strong today as it was when we were 
founded in 1935. Thank you to all of  
our staff for their hard work and 
dedication serving our clients during 
the past 12 months. 

Outlook
The Board and management team 
firmly believe that the challenges 
Slater and Gordon are facing can be 
overcome and that the business can 
be reset to deliver strong financial 
results as it has done consistently prior 
to FY16. We remain convinced that 
taking a leadership position in both 
the Australian and UK consumer legal 
services market best places us to deliver 
long-term value for our shareholders.

We thank you for your continued 
support of Slater and Gordon and  
look forward to updating you on  
our progress.

John Skippen 
Chair

Andrew Grech 
Group Managing Director

Slater and Gordon Limited  3

Annual Report 2016Overview

Who We Are

Employees

Australia

1,330

UK

3,310

Locations

Australia
61

UK
25

Australia

Brands

UK

Slater and Gordon invests  
in a suite of key brands to  
drive client enquiries.

•  Personal Injury Law (PIL)  

Provides expert legal services in 
a range of personal injury areas 
including motor vehicle accidents, 
workers’ compensation and  
civil liability law.

•  General Law (GL)  

GL is made up of Personal Legal 
Services (PLS) and Business and 
Specialised Litigation Services 
(B&SLS). PLS comprises family law, 
conveyancing, wills, estate planning 
and probate practices. B&SLS 
comprises business law, property law, 

Services

estate, employment and professional 
negligence litigation, class or group 
actions and criminal defence work. 

•  Claims 

Our Slater Gordon Solutions claims 
business deals with the origination,  
assessment and resolution of personal 
injury claims with a focus on road 
traffic accidents.

•  Motor and Health services 

Slater Gordon Solutions also provides 
motor vehicle accident management 
support and rehabilitation and 
medical reporting management 
solutions.

FY16 Revenue A$908.2 million

Slater and Gordon Lawyers 
Australia 26%

Slater and Gordon Lawyers 
UK 24%

Slater Gordon Solutions 50%

4  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016Strategy

Our Mission
To give people easy 
access to world-
class legal services

Our Strategy
•  Build an effective operating 

platform in the UK

•   Continue to improve our 

Australian business
•  Continue to lead the 

consolidation of consumer 
legal services markets in 
Australia and the UK

Our Objectives
• Satisfy our clients
• Engage our staff
•  Use increased  
cash earnings  
to reduce debt
•  Deliver improved 
returns to our  
shareholders

Our Values
•  Do it right
•  Work well with others
•  Take the lead

Slater and Gordon Limited  5

Annual Report 2016People and Culture

Slater and Gordon is a people business 
and everyone across the organisation 
plays a pivotal role in enabling us to 
deliver a great service to our clients. 
Whilst FY16 has presented a number  
of challenges, we have continued 
to invest in our Australian and UK 
teams to build a values-led, high-
performance culture that will enable 
us to achieve our mission of providing 
people with easy access to world-class 
legal services. 

Culture and Values
A revised set of values was launched 
across the Group in FY15 to underpin 
the culture we are striving to embed. 
The last 12 months have seen a number 
of initiatives implemented to integrate 
these values into our performance and 
reward framework. This is helping 
to create a business where everyday 
activity is guided by these behaviours 
to create a strong culture across both 
Australia and the UK.

Building Capability 
We have continued to review and 
develop our recruitment and retention 
processes to ensure we attract and  
keep the best people. By investing  
in designing and delivering a broader 
learning curriculum, the business has 
made significant progress in ensuring 
that our people have the skills and 
confidence to deliver a great client 
experience. Not only have we enhanced 
our leadership and professional 
development programs, but we have 
also begun work to develop a talent 
management framework to help 
prepare those with high potential  
for future roles within our business.

Employee Wellbeing 
In recognition of the importance of 
creating a working environment where 
our people feel supported to perform 
and maximise their potential both 
personally and professionally, we have 
placed significant emphasis on providing 
a wide range of initiatives to support the 
health and wellbeing of our employees. 
Up-skilling our people leaders to 
proactively identify potential issues, 
mitigating risks and providing access  
to support resources remain integral  
to our commitment to our people. 

6  Slater and Gordon Limited

We have continued to review 
and develop our recruitment 
and retention processes to 
ensure we attract and keep 
the best people.

Annual Report 2016Slater and Gordon Limited  7

Annual Report 2016Social Responsibility

Environmental Responsibility 
Slater and Gordon Group recognises 
that it has an obligation to reduce the 
Company’s impact on the environment 
and to imbed sustainable work 
practices.

Since priorities and reduction targets 
were established in the Company’s 
FY14 Environment and Sustainability 
Strategic Plan (Australia), we have 
been measuring and monitoring data 
to ensure that we are on track and that 
targets are appropriate and reasonably 
achievable. The strategy focuses  
on reductions across four key areas: 
paper, electricity, travel and waste, as 
well as general sustainability matters.

This work is overseen by an 
environment management team 
in the Australian business, which 
is made up of representatives of 
key business units. Activity is also 
undertaken in consultation with our 
employee Environmental Consultation 
Committee.

While progress has been made in 
achieving the key deliverables set for 
FY16, including surpassing our FY17 
target for energy use, a review of 
current data shows that improvements 
need to be made to travel and paper 
use to meet targets. 

As part of our pledge to improve our 
external environmental reporting, 
our overall environmental footprint 
was published in the Australian Legal 
Sector Alliance’s annual report. We 
will use this tool to provide greater 
visibility to our efforts and to drive 
further improvements in our key  
impact areas. 

•  increasing the donations collected 

through the Slater and Gordon Staff 
Giving Program in Australia; 

•  operating two ‘Give-As-You-Earn’ 

charity schemes in the UK with many 
employees donating to St Ann’s 
Hospice in Manchester or making 
contributions through the Charitable 
Aid Foundation;

•  partnering with a foundation and 

encouraging staff to volunteer with a 
program assisting the homeless and 
disadvantaged in Melbourne;

•  UK fundraising efforts for Children in 
Need and Macmillan Cancer Relief;

•  providing two grants for the 

Tracey McGuckin Travel Award, 
an award named in honour of 
a former employee providing 
financial support to help cover 
travel and accommodation expenses 
for an educational, charitable or 
community building project in  
the UK or abroad; 

•  partnering with the Brisbane 

Broncos on a number of initiatives 
including giving 1,000 children 
across Queensland the opportunity 
to participate in the Broncos Mini 
League; and

•  supporting athletes and officials in 

the lead up to the Rio 2016 Olympic 
Games, as the official supplier of 
legal services to the Australian 
Olympic Team.

We also undertook the provision of  
pro bono support to many individuals 
and community groups in Australia  
and the UK including:

•   the Cancer Council’s pro bono  

legal referral scheme;

•   advocacy for asylum seekers 

currently in detention;

•  volunteering at a Lesbian Gay Bisexual 

Transgender Intersex (LGBTI) 
community legal clinic; and

•   participating on legal panels for 

Aftermath, the Limbless Association, 
Mesothelioma UK and various 
asbestos support groups in the UK. 

Increasing the affordability and 
accessibility of legal services and 
products for consumers is central to 
everything we do at Slater and Gordon. 
Over the years we have actively 
responded to changes in the legal 
industry and consumer expectations 
and addressed unmet needs through 
innovations such as the pioneering 
introduction of ‘No win – No fee’ 
arrangements, fixed fees and online 
legal service offerings. We seek  
to make a positive contribution to  
the communities where we operate  
and offer opportunities for our  
people through our social  
responsibility program. 

Our social responsibility program  
has three key areas of focus:

1.   Assisting people with disease  

and disability.

2.  Addressing inequality and 

disadvantage.

3.  Encouraging people to engage  

in healthy activity and lifestyles. 

During FY16 we continued our 
significant investment in supporting 
individuals, communities and 
organisations aligned to our program 
objectives in Australia, while in the UK 
we consulted across relevant business 
units and practice groups to develop 
a cohesive and aligned strategy for 
implementation in FY17. 

FY16 highlights included:

•  distributing $117,000 to medical 

research organisations in Australia 
and £50,000 to health or research 
groups in the UK from the Slater  
and Gordon Health Projects and 
Research Fund;

•  being awarded the largest corporate 
team title at both the Melbourne and 
Brisbane Mother’s Day Classic  
events held in Australia; 

•  supporting the Spinal Injuries 

Association and sponsoring road 
safety and victim support charities 
such as BRAKE, Headway and 
Roadpeace in the UK; 

•  donating $94,000 to community 

groups in Australia from the Slater 
and Gordon Community Fund;

8  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016The team behind  
the team.

Slater and Gordon Limited  9

Annual Report 2016Board of Directors

John Skippen

Andrew Grech

Ian Court1

Chair since 2012, Non-Executive 
Director since 2010. Chair of the 
Nomination Committee and member 
of the Audit, Compliance and Risk 
Management Committee.

Group Managing Director since 2000, 
Executive Director since 2001.

Non-Executive Director since 2007.  
Member of the Audit, Compliance and 
Risk Management and Remuneration 
Committees.

Ken Fowlie1

Erica Lane1

James M Millar

Chief Executive Officer, UK. 
Executive Director since 2003. 

Non-Executive Director since 2008.  
Chair of the Remuneration Committee.

Member of the Audit, Compliance and 
Risk Management Committee.

Non-Executive Director since 2015.  
Chair of the Audit, Compliance and 
Risk Management Committee.

Rhonda O’Donnell

Non-Executive Director since 2013.  
Member of the Audit, Compliance  
and Risk Management, Remuneration 
and Nomination Committees.

1.  Retired from board of directors  

30 August 2016.

10  Slater and Gordon Limited

In FY17 Tom Brown was appointed to the Slater and Gordon Board as a  
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Remuneration Committee commencing  
1 September 2016. An additional Non-Executive Director will be appointed in  
the course of FY17.

For detailed information on each Director see pages 23 to 26.

Annual Report 2016Operating and Financial Review

Review of Operations – 
Business Model
Overview 
Slater and Gordon Group is a market-
leading consumer legal services 
organisation with 4,640 staff operating 
in 86 locations across Australia and 
the UK. The Group provides legal 
services in two main areas of consumer 
law – Personal Injury Law (including 
motor vehicle accidents, workers’ 
compensation/employers liability, 
industrial disease and civil liability law) 
and General Law (including family law, 
conveyancing, wills, estate planning, 
probate, business and specialised 
litigation, class actions, real estate, 
crime and regulation, employment, 
reputation and professional discipline). 
Slater and Gordon became the world’s 
first listed law firm in 2007 and after 
successfully pursuing a strategy 
of geographic and practice area 
diversification in Australia, expanded 
into the UK in 2012. The UK business 
has since grown, organically and 
through further acquisition, into a 
leading UK consumer law firm with 
strong brand awareness. In FY15 the 
Group acquired a number of business 
assets from Watchstone Group Plc 
(formerly known as Quindell Plc), 
and has since re-branded it as Slater 
Gordon Solutions (SGS). The Group 
has three main operating segments: 
Slater and Gordon Lawyers Australia 
(SGL Australia), Slater and Gordon 
Lawyers UK (SGL UK) and SGS. The 
UK business is currently undergoing  
a major reorganisation to realign  
the business to serve the markets  
it operates in efficiently and to  
improve profitability.

Business Model 
Slater and Gordon’s mission is to 
provide people with easier access to 
world-class legal services. This is 
achieved by operating in segments of 
the legal market to which high levels 
of process and systems engineering 
can be applied to build operations of 
scale and capability that provide highly 
specialised services with a great deal  
of price certainty for clients. 

Revenue is generated from providing 
legal and associated services to 
approximately 395,000 individual 
clients across Australia and the UK 
annually and is not reliant on any one 
key customer or case outcome. In FY16, 
64% of fee and services revenue was 
derived from Personal Injury Law (PIL) 
and 72% of fee and services revenue 
came from the UK. Most PIL work is 
performed on a conditional fee basis 
(‘No Win – No Fee’) where legal fees 
are paid on the successful conclusion  
of a client’s matter. In line with 
Australian accounting standards  
(AASB – 15 Revenue from Contracts 
with Customers), PIL revenue is 
recognised over the life of a case 
using a stage of completion basis, 
which relates to specific claim-
related milestones for each matter. 
Recognising revenue on this basis 
gives rise to a corresponding asset on 
the balance sheet – work in progress 
(WIP) that represents the value of work 
completed but unbilled at the end of 
the period. The majority of General 
Law (GL) work is conducted on a fee 
for service basis. Class actions are 
largely funded by third parties on a fee 
for service basis. The Motor Services 
and Health Services divisions of SGS 
earn services revenue by providing car 
hire and repair services and medical 
report procurement and rehabilitation 
services respectively. 

Major Events During the Year

Quindell Plc (now renamed 
Watchstone Group Plc)
On 5 August 2015, Quindell Plc, the 
vendor of SGS, published qualified 
financial statements in which the 
current directors and auditors of 
Quindell Plc explained, inter alia, 
that relevant information relating to 
transactions entered into by the former 
directors that could impact on the 
accounting, intention, commercial 
purpose or value of certain transactions 
was not available to them. On 5 August 
2015 the Serious Fraud Office in the UK 
advised that it had opened a criminal 
investigation into the business and 
accounting practices of Quindell Plc. 

The acquisition of SGS was structured  
as an acquisition of the various  
entities rather than an acquisition  
of the common stock of Quindell Plc. 
Moreover, Quindell Plc provided 
detailed warranties to the Company  
in relation to the operation of the assets 
comprising SGS. Those warranties  
are secured by a Warranty Escrow 
account holding £50 million. 

The Directors are confident that the 
Company has no liability as a result 
of the matters described above. In the 
course of preparing these financial 
statements, the Directors have 
sought to identify, understand and 
properly account for all relevant prior 
transactions undertaken by entities 
within SGS. Despite reasonable 
inquiries, including of current directors 
of Quindell Plc, the Directors are 
unable to identify or rationalise every 
historic transaction undertaken by the 
former directors of the various entities 
and have made fair value adjustments 
as appropriate. The Directors believe 
that none of the known transactions 
relate to the fundamental business 
activities or economics of SGS and  
none of the known transactions are 
material in value or effect.

Accounting Changes 
In August 2015, Slater and Gordon 
announced several accounting changes 
to enhance financial reporting including 
the early adoption of AASB–15, the 
new accounting standard for revenue 
recognition, at 31 December 2015.

The new standard requires that 
revenue under ‘No Win – No Fee’ 
arrangements only be recognised when 
it is ‘highly probable that a significant 
reversal of revenue recognised will 
not occur’. Prior to the adoption of 
AASB–15, Slater and Gordon had 
applied AASB–118 which requires  
that revenue only be recognised when  
it is ‘probable’ that the economic 
benefits associated with a transaction 
will flow to a company.

Slater and Gordon Limited  11

Annual Report 2016 
Operating and Financial Review continued

UK Performance  
Improvement Program 
In February 2016 the Company 
commenced execution of a 
comprehensive performance 
improvement program in the UK. As  
a part of this program, the Company 
will accelerate a reorganisation of its 
legal services businesses and operate  
through three specialised legal services 
divisions across the UK. It intends to 
continue to offer motor, health and 
other services adjacent to the delivery 
of services by its legal services divisions. 

The program is on track in terms of 
implementation and delivery of benefits. 
The organisational restructure is 
progressing to plan with office closures 
and reorganisations substantially  
due for completion by the first quarter 
of 2017. 

Restructure of Finance Facilities 
In May 2016, the Group announced the 
successful agreement of amendments 
to its existing Syndicated Facility 
Agreement (‘Facility’) with its lending 
group. The limits and maturity 
profile of the amended facility are 
substantially the same as the previous 
facility. The facility includes a number 
of terms and conditions usual for a 
facility of this nature. These include 
increased frequency of reporting to 
the lending group, semi-annual debt 
amortisation and no declaration or 
payment of dividends.

Vesting Convertible 
Redeemable (VCR) Share Loans 
The repayment of loans attached to 
all Vesting Convertible Redeemable 
(VCR) ordinary shares at 30 June 2016 
has been extended to 30 June 2018. 

The Company will participate in the 
consultation process foreshadowed  
by the Ministry of Justice and has  
made its best effort to factor potential 
changes into its assessment of the 
carrying value of goodwill and the 
resultant impairment losses recorded  
at 31 December 2015, even though 
results are not yet certain. Slater and 
Gordon maintains its view that SGS 
will be well positioned to be a leading 
provider of services to people who 
require legal, car hire, car repair  
and rehabilitation services assistance  
as a result of road traffic accidents  
and legal services for other fast track  
claims in the UK.

Goodwill Impairment 
In the first half of the year ended  
30 June 2016, the Company recognised 
a non-cash impairment charge of 
$876.4 million against the carrying 
value of its goodwill. The majority  
of this is accounted for by the  
$814.2 million impairment in goodwill 
from the SGS acquisition. This arises 
from a downward revision in the 
expectation for future performance of 
SGS having regard for the poorer than 
anticipated financial performance since 
acquisition and the assessment of its 
prospects going forward. In addition, 
the proposed changes to UK laws  
and the associated uncertainty of  
the future earnings trajectory of the  
UK business have been assessed and  
the assumptions addressing these  
issues have contributed to 27% of  
the impairment. 

There was also a $52.7 million 
impairment charge in the Australian 
business. $13.9 million of this related  
to the General Law cash-generating 
unit and $38.8 million arose in the  
PIL cash generating unit as a result  
of moving to a methodology based on 
the performance of state based rather 
than national cash-generating units  
for assessing goodwill impairment.  
An additional $3.1 million impairment 
was recognised in PIL in the second half 
subsequent to the New South Wales 
Government announcing proposed 
changes to motor vehicle accident 
compensation. The proposals are not 
expected to have a material impact  
on the Group’s performance.

Review of Operations – 
Business Model continued
To reflect the requirements of the 
new standard, the Company, in 
consultation with accounting and 
actuarial advisers has refined its 
methodology for measuring work in 
progress (WIP). The new methodology 
is underpinned by a more data 
driven approach to valuing WIP and 
specifically, the determination of 
average fees per file and probability  
of success. Consistent with the previous 
standard, revenue continues to be 
recognised over time, or the life of 
a case, using a basis that relates to 
specific claim-related milestones  
for each client matter.

The Company has adopted the 
new accounting standard on a fully 
retrospective basis. This necessitated 
derivation of WIP balances under  
the new standard as at 1 July 2014,  
31 December 2014, 30 June 2015 and 
31 December 2015. WIP balances 
under AASB–15 are lower than 
the previously existing AASB –118 
balances by approximately 15% to 
20% throughout that date range. This 
outcome provides comfort that the 
previous methodology, which had an 
inherent requirement for higher levels 
of management judgement, provides 
sound outcomes given the lower 
probability thresholds which  
previously applied.

Application of AASB –15 will provide 
greater consistency and a more 
systematic approach to generating 
reported values of revenue and WIP.

Potential UK Legislative Changes 
In November 2015 the ‘Autumn 2015 
Chancellor’s Statement’ included 
proposals that if implemented, would 
impact on the rights of people to obtain 
compensation in minor soft tissue 
injury claims and also see the limit  
of the Small Claims Court increase 
from £1,000 to £5,000.

12  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
Slater and Gordon Limited  13

Annual Report 2016Operating and Financial Review continued

Review of Operations – Profit and Financial Position 
A summary of Slater and Gordon’s results for the year ended 30 June 2016 and the prior corresponding period are shown below.

Total Revenue 

EBITDAW 1 

EBITDAW – normalised 2

Net (loss)/profit after tax 

Net (loss)/profit after tax – normalised3

Net operating cash flow 

Gross operating cash flow – normalised4

FY16 
A$m

908.2

(49.3)

36.6

(1,017.6)

(48.7)

(104.2)

(57.6)

FY15 
A$m

598.2

92.6

69.3

62.4

39.1

40.8

56.0

1.  EBITDAW is defined as earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation and movement in work in progress and is presented 

prior to non-cash impairment. 

2.  Normalised for AASB –3 adjustments, additional debtor/disbursement provisioning and non-recurring restructuring costs.
3.   Normalised for AASB –3 adjustments, goodwill impairment, additional debtor/disbursement provisioning and non-recurring 

restructuring costs, finance costs and tax impact of normalisations.

4.  Gross operating cash flow (GOCF) is defined as net cash (utilised)/provided by operating activities before interest received, borrowing 
costs paid, income tax paid and payments to former owners. GOCF has been normalised for non-recurring restructuring payments  
to suppliers.

EBITDAW, EBITDAW – normalised, gross operating cash flow – normalised and net (loss)/profit after tax – normalised 
balances presented in this report are unaudited non-IFRS measures that, in the opinion of the Directors, are useful in 
understanding and appraising the Company’s performance.

Slater and Gordon reported a  
$1,017.6 million loss for the year  
ended 30 June 2016. The full year 
result was impacted by:

•   $879.5 million non-cash impairment 
charge against the carrying value of 
goodwill, $876.4 million of which 
was recognised in the first half  
of the financial year; 

•  application of a revised accounting 
policy for revenue recognition as 
a result of early adoption of new 
accounting standard AASB–15 
(Revenue from Contracts with 
Customers). A negative net movement 
in work in progress (WIP) of $41.3 
million was recorded in FY16 due 
to case settlements exceeding the 
number of new files opened in Slater 
and Gordon Lawyers (SGL) Australia 
and reduced case volumes in SGL UK;

•  $33.3 million of non-recurring 
restructuring costs including 
consultants costs, redundancy  
and property rationalisation  
costs associated with the Group’s  
UK operations; 

•  $33.2 million of cash and share-

based payments to former owners 
recognised under the Group’s 
accounting policies for acquisition 
consideration (AASB–3 Business 
Combinations), which were  
adopted in FY15; 

•   $18.7 million of additional 

provisioning for debtors and 
disbursements across the Group;

The consolidated statement of profit  
or loss and other comprehensive 
income contains a number of 
transactions that have been normalised 
to provide greater clarity to the 
underlying operational results. The 
normalisation items for FY16 and  
the FY15 comparative period are:

i.  

impairment charge against the 
carrying value of goodwill;

•  underperformance in the UK 

ii.  payments to former owners 

operations, in relation to resolution 
of personal injuries claims in Slater 
and Gordon Lawyers (SGL UK) 
and Slater Gordon Solutions (SGS) 
including lower resolutions in  
respect of Noise Induced Hearing 
Loss (NIHL) claims; 

•   finance costs of $42.5 million,  
which included $14.9 million in  
non-recurring facility establishment 
and amendment fees; and

•  a tax credit of $11.9 million derived 

from UK current year tax losses and 
prior year fair value adjustments, 
noting that goodwill impairment  
is not tax deductible.

reclassified as remuneration under 
the new accounting treatment  
for deferred consideration  
under AASB–3;

iii.  restructuring costs in relation to  
the UK business reorganisation; 

iv.  additional provisioning for debtors 
and disbursements following  
a thorough review of  
provisioning policies;

v.  gain from bargain purchase  

in FY15 resulting from the change  
in accounting policy in relation 
to the treatment of deferred 
consideration under AASB–3 
Business Combinations; and

vi.  costs relating to acquisitions.

14  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016The impact of these normalisations on net (loss)/profit after tax is as follows:

Net (loss)/profit after tax – reported

Normalisation adjustments:

Goodwill impairment charge 

Payments to former owners

Non-recurring restructuring costs

Additional debtor/disbursement provisioning

Finance costs 

Gain from bargain purchase 

Costs associated with acquisitions

Tax implications of above 

Net (loss)/profit after tax – normalised

FY16 
A$m

(1,017.6)

879.5

33.2

33.3

18.7

14.9

-

0.7

(11.4)

(48.7)

FY15 
A$m

62.4

-

25.4

-

-

-

(72.5)

23.8

-

39.1

Total revenue and other income 
increased by 51.8% due mainly to a full 
year contribution from SGS, acquired 
in May 2015. This increase was partly 
offset by reduced total revenue from 
SGL Australia and SGL UK, both of 
which were impacted by negative 
movements in WIP during the period. 
Fee and services revenue, excluding 
the movement in work in progress, 
prior year gain from bargain purchase 
and other income increased in SGL 
Australia and SGL UK by 8.1% and 
1.8% respectively. SGL Australia and 
SGL UK segment results are discussed 
in more detail from page 17.

Total revenue in the consolidated 
statement of profit or loss and other 
comprehensive income includes an 
item shown separately as ‘Services 
revenue’. This amount represents  
the revenue associated with the SGS 
Motor and Health Services businesses. 
The ‘Cost of sales’ line item also 
relates to the SGS Motor and Health 
Services businesses. 

The largest components of operating 
costs are salaries and employee 
benefits. These also increased 
materially in FY16 due to a full year 
contribution from SGS. There are also 
material marketing and advertising 
expenses to support the Slater and 
Gordon suite of brands, with brand 
awareness being a key driver of client 
enquiries. Advertising and marketing 
expense also now includes other new 
business acquisition costs for SGS. SGS 
acquires new business from strategic 
partners including insurance industry 
participants and claims management 
companies and seeks to turn them into 
successfully resolved outcomes in a 
relatively short space of time. 

After disappointing and unacceptable 
performance in the first half of 
the financial year the Company 
implemented a performance 

improvement program in the second 
half, to improve profitability and cash 
performance across the business. These 
initiatives have had a positive impact on 
second half financial performance with 
Group EBITDAW of $9.0 million in  
the second half, compared to a  
$58.3 million first half loss.

Cash Flow 
Net operating cash flow improved 
materially in H2 FY16 to an 
outflow of $20.9 million (H1 FY16: 
outflow of $83.3 million). The 
Company recognises that significant 
improvement is still required to 
restore cash flow, however the trend is 
positive with H2 FY16 GOCF just over 
breakeven when normalised for non-
recurring restructuring payments. 

Financial Position 
A summary of key items relating to the Group’s financial position is provided below. 

Net assets 

Net debt 

Loan and overdraft facilities – £ denominated 

Loan and overdraft facilities – A$ denominated 

FY 16 
A$m

305.1

682.3

376.0

94.0

FY15 
A$m

1,350.2

614.1

376.0

95.0

Slater and Gordon Limited  15

Annual Report 2016Operating and Financial Review continued

Review of Operations – 
Profit and Financial Position 
continued
Net Assets 
The Group has net assets of  
$305.1 million, which has decreased 
by $1,045.1 million since 30 June 2015 
primarily due to a goodwill impairment 
charge of $879.5 million, mainly 
relating to impairment of goodwill 
from the SGS acquisition. 

The significant balance sheet items are:
WIP – representing the value of work 
completed but unbilled; Receivables 
– including trade receivables and 
disbursements to support a client matter 
that are reimbursed at settlement; 
Borrowings (see Debt section below); 
and lastly Payables – including trade 
payables and legal creditors where 
Slater and Gordon has arranged deferred 
conditional payment terms on behalf of 
the client in relation to the disbursements 
incurred on a client matter.

Debt 
At 30 June 2016, gross debt was  
$764.8 million and net debt  
$682.3 million. In May 2016, the 
Group announced amendments to its 
existing Syndicated Facility Agreement 
(‘Facility’) with its lending group.  

The facility included loan facility, bank 
guarantees and/or letter of credit with 
an overall limit of £375 million and  
$90 million with expiry dates between 
May 2018 and March 2019. As at  
30 June 2016, the Group remains in 
compliance with all undertakings  
under the Facility. 

In the balance sheet, foreign currency 
balances are translated at the spot rate 
at the 30 June 2015 and 2016 reporting 
dates. This accordingly has a foreign 
exchange translation impact upon the 
reported debt balances in a number  
of ways:

i.  movement in the foreign exchange 
rate from one period to another 
where the exchange rate (or spot 
rate) has changed (i.e. the impact 
the foreign exchange movement has 
on the opening balance); 

ii.  a differential in the exchange rate 
from the cash flow from financing 
activities for proceeds or repayment 
of borrowings as a result of using 
an average exchange rate. Where 
the proceeds or repayments 
of borrowings are individually 
immaterial, an average foreign 
exchange rate is used, and as such 
there is a translation difference 
between the average rate and the 
year-end exchange rate; and

iii.  where a significant transaction has 
occurred, such as the drawdown  
of borrowings for the Slater Gordon 
Solutions transaction, the cash flow 
translates at the exchange rate at the 
transaction date. As such, there is a 
translation difference for the impact 
the foreign exchange movement 
between the transaction date and 
the year-end exchange rate.

Dividends 
Directors have not declared a dividend 
for the 2016 financial year consistent 
with its undertakings in the Facility 
amendments.

Off Balance Sheet Items 
The balance sheet does not include 
a value for WIP associated with the 
portfolio of noise induced hearing  
loss (NIHL) cases acquired as part  
of the SGS acquisition. Once stronger 
evidence is collected in relation to the 
likely success rates of the NIHL cases,  
an appropriate value for the WIP will 
be revisited. 

Review of Operations – 
Segment Performance 
A summary of revenue and earnings  
by segment is provided below.

Fee and services revenue1 

SGL Australia 

SGL UK

SGS

Group

(Loss)/Profit before tax and net finance expense 

SGL Australia 

SGL UK

SGS

Group

EBITDAW – Normalised 

SGL Australia 

SGL UK

SGS

Group 

FY16 
A$m

265.6

230.0

437.2

932.8

FY16 
A$m

(100.9)

(64.4)

(822.6)

(987.9)

FY16 
A$m

35.9

(2.6)

3.3

36.6

FY15 
A$m

245.7

226.0

35.0

506.7

FY15 
A$m

78.3

21.0

(6.0)

93.3

FY15 
A$m

41.6

33.3

(5.6)

69.3

Variance 
%

8.1

1.8

1,149.1

84.1

Variance 
%

(228.9)

(406.7)

(13,610.0)

(1,158.8)

Variance 
%

(13.7)

(107.8)

(158.9)

(47.2)

1.   Fee and services revenue is revenue from contracts with customers less movement in WIP. 

16  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016Slater and Gordon Lawyers 
Australia (SGL Australia)

Overview of Operations 
SGL Australia is a market-leading 
provider of consumer legal services 
enjoying approximately 25% market 
share in the Personal Injury Law (PIL)
market and a growing share in key 
areas of the General Law (GL) market.  
SGL Australia employs 1,330 staff 
across 61 locations.

The PIL business provides legal services 
to people in a range of areas including 
motor vehicle accidents, workers 
compensation and civil liability law. 
The PIL practice contributed 77%  
of SGL Australia’s FY16 fee and  
services revenue.

The GL business is made up of Personal 
Legal Services (PLS) and Business and 
Specialised Litigation Services (B&SLS) 
practice areas. PLS comprises family and 
relationship law, conveyancing, wills, 
estate planning and probate practices. 
Work is predominantly performed 
on a fixed fee basis. B&SLS comprises 
commercial, estate, employment and 
professional negligence litigation, class 
or group actions and criminal defence 
work. The GL practice contributed  
23% of SGL Australia’s FY16 fee and 
services revenue.

The Australian consumer legal services 
market is highly regulated, with 
regulations varying state by state.  
SGL Australia has used its scale and 
strong brand awareness to deliver 
stable revenues and earnings by 
successfully responding to legislative 
change as and when it arises. 

Strategic priorities for SGL Australia 
are protecting and improving operating 
leverage in PIL and significantly 
growing market share and achieving 
scale in selected areas of GL.

FY16 Performance Review
•   Total fee and services revenue growth 
of 8.1% was an encouraging result 
comprising growth in PIL and GL.

•   PIL growth was driven by strong 
performances in Victoria, South 
Australia and Western Australia. 
Performance in New South Wales was 
stable while Queensland continued 
to adjust to the impact of workers 
compensation legislative change.

•   The GL business delivered 13.4% 

growth in fee and services revenue 
in FY16 due to growth in the B&SLS 
and family law practices. The 
conveyancing practice continued  
to perform below expectations  
and a strategic review will be 
completed shortly.

•  Despite the strong operating revenue 
performance, total SGL Australia 
revenue declined in FY16 due to a 
$27.8 million adverse movement  
in the value of WIP.

•   The net loss before tax and interest 
includes $55.8 million of goodwill 
impairment, a $27.8 million adverse 
movement in WIP and $22.1 million of 
non-recurring restructuring costs and 
debtors/disbursement provisioning.

•  Normalised EBITDAW declined due to 
underperformance in some PIL practice 
groups, a deteriorating performance 
in conveyancing and an increase in 
the cost base associated with labour 
costs, IT costs, audit fees, legal fees 
and other corporate expenses.

Slater and Gordon UK 
The Slater and Gordon Group 
entered the UK market in 2012 and 
has established a circa £300 million 
turnover integrated legal and allied 
services business with a leading position 
in each of the markets it serves, built 
on service excellence and innovation, 
strategic partnerships and growing 
brand awareness. 

The Group operates in the UK as Slater 
and Gordon Lawyers (SGL UK) and 
Slater Gordon Solutions 

(SGS) employing 3,310 staff across 
25 locations. SGS is comprised of the 
claims, motor and health businesses.

In February 2016 the Group announced 
a major UK business reorganisation, 
which is focused on establishing centres 
of excellence in serious and specialist 
personal injury, fast track personal 
injury and general law services as well 
as rationalising the provision of shared 
services across the UK. 

SGL UK

Overview of Operations 
As part of the UK business 
reorganisation, SGL UK has been 
restructured to focus on delivering 
personal injury services in serious and 
specialist personal injury law claims  
as well as targeted areas of general law. 

The SGL UK Serious and Specialist 
Practice (SSP) provides legal services  
to clients in a range of personal injury 
law practice areas including motor 
vehicle accidents and employers 
liability, as well as in specialist 
areas such as industrial disease, 
clinical negligence, abuse and travel 
claims. The practice also provides 
specialist services to member services 
organisations. The SSP contributed 
76% of SGL UK’s FY16 fee and  
services revenue.

The SGL UK General Law (GL) business 
is organised into three practice areas: 
personal legal services – providing 
services such as employment, family 
law, residential property and crime; 
business law services – providing 
services such as commercial real estate, 
regulatory, business advisory and 
dispute resolution; and group litigation. 
SGL UK has the largest family and 
claimant employment law practices  
in the UK. 

The strategic priorities of SGL UK are 
building market share and improving 
operating leverage in SSP and growing 
market share and scale in selected 
areas of GL.

Slater and Gordon Limited  17

Annual Report 2016Operating and Financial Review continued

There are three SGS operating 
businesses – Claims, Health and 
Motor Services. The Claims business 
deals with the origination, assessment 
and resolution of personal injury law 
claims with a focus on road traffic 
accidents. The Motor business division 
provides accident management 
services to affinity groups  for the 
benefit of road users. The services 
include co-ordination of the 
provision of temporary replacement 
vehicles and automotive repairs. The 
Health Services business provides 
rehabilitation and medical reporting 
solutions that may be required as part 
of a personal injury claim.

•   While NIHL resolution levels remain 

lower than anticipated when the 
business was acquired, management 
has made significant progress with 
internal process improvements and 
engagement with key counterparties.

•   Management has delivered 

consistently high levels of service 
performance to partners in SGS 
Motor and has made steady progress 
in reducing aged debt levels. 

•   SGS Health has performed broadly  
in accordance with expectations 
given intake volumes, benefiting from 
Group synergy opportunities and a 
stabilising operating environment.

SGS is also currently progressing a 
portfolio of noise induced hearing loss 
(NIHL) claims; however, substantial 
losses were made in FY16 from this 
portfolio of cases. As cases mature 
and protocols for resolution of claims 
are developed with insurers, revenue 
earned from settlement of cases will 
displace the cost of claims management 
over time.

Business Strategy  
and Prospects 
Business Strategy
The Group’s core strategy is to lead  
the consolidation of the consumer  
legal services market in Australia and 
the UK and to participate in adjacent 
markets where to do so complements 
its legal services offering. 

Having established critical mass in both 
markets in which it operates, the Group 
aims to deliver sustainable shareholder 
returns through a business strategy 
built on organic growth and operational 
improvement. From an operational 
perspective, this involves the continued 
strengthening of the Group’s 
current market-leading position in 
the consumer law market as well as 
optimising business performance. The 
current focus of the senior management 
team is executing a performance 
improvement program across the 
business to improve profitability  
and cash flow and reduce debt. 

FY16 Performance Review
•  The FY16 SGS net loss before tax and 
finance costs was $822.6 million.  
The primary driver to this was the 
first half goodwill impairment  
charge of $814.2 million.

•   SGS delivered positive $3.3 million 
normalised EBITDAW for FY16. 
There was significant improvement 
in H2 performance with normalised 
EBITDAW of $27.3 million compared 
to a $24.0 million H1 normalised 
EBITDAW loss.

•  Management has driven consistent 
quarterly improvement in claims 
handling and resolution activity 
in SGS Claims, resulting in a 
30% improvement in total billed 
revenue (from Q1 to Q4) in RTA 
claims underpinned by a substantial 
improvement in case handler 
productivity. 

Review of Operations – 
Segment Performance  
continued

FY16 Performance Review
•   SGL UK performed disappointingly 

in H1 FY16 and management 
commenced a fundamental business 
reorganisation in H2 FY16, which 
resulted in a reduction in both 
operating sites and total headcount. 

•   Benefits have been realised from  
the reorganisation with GBP fee  
and services revenue growth on  
a substantially lower overall cost 
base, driving positive $7.6 million  
H2 normalised EBITDAW compared 
to a $10.2 million first half loss.

•   As part of the reorganisation, 

private client fast track Road Traffic 
Accidents (RTA) and employers 
liability enquiries secured by the 
Slater and Gordon Lawyers brand 
were successfully transferred to  
the SGS Claims business.

•   Progress in the remediation and 

improvement of process and systems 
also contributed to the improved  
H2 financial performance.

•   Prompted brand awareness has 

continued to strengthen, despite a 
moderation in overall investment, 
with the Slater and Gordon Lawyers 
brand now recognised by 28% of 
UK survey respondents. New client 
enquiry numbers also continue  
to grow.

Slater Gordon Solutions (SGS)

Overview of Operations 
SGS was acquired in May 2015 and is 
the leading fast track personal injury 
legal services provider in the UK, 
operating across the personal injury 
claims management value chain to 
provide claims, motor and health 
services. It is a collection of client-
focused businesses with systems and 
processes that have been designed  
to fully service the needs of the ‘not  
at fault’ party who suffers loss or 
damage from an accident from one 
initial phone call.

18  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016The Group has performance 
improvement programs in place 
designed to standardise, centralise, 
optimise and promote efficient and 
innovative operating platforms,  
IT systems and people strategies.  

Competition and Market Share
The Group operates in a competitive 
market, which may adversely impact  
its financial performance and position. 
Increased competition for clients can 
lead to compression in profit margins 
or drive changes to market share. 
Strategic planning, innovation in 
marketing and IT systems, alignment 
of acquired businesses with Group 
practices and investment in business 
development opportunities are 
activities the Group undertakes to  
grow market share and protect the 
Slater and Gordon Group brand.

Material Risks of the Group
Legislative Change Risk 
The Group activities are subject 
to extensive regulation. Adverse 
regulatory or legislative changes 
may adversely impact the Group’s 
operations, financial performance  
and position.

Comprehensive stakeholder 
engagement, informed discussion, 
government consultation to advocate 
our position, modelling of the potential 
impact of changes and business model 
and the optimisation of practice 
management service offerings are 
initiatives we use to monitor, manage 
and protect against potential  
legislative changes.

Financial Risk
It is critical that the Group ensures  
that it has appropriate liquidity to  
meet its financial commitments. 

The building blocks of effective cash 
management are monitored on an 
ongoing basis by the business, being 
working capital optimisation, cash flow 
forecasting and liquidity management.
Key mitigating activities include 
monthly reporting and ensuring that 
the requirements of the Syndicated 
Facility Agreement are met. 

Operational Risk 
There are a number of key risks that arise 
directly from the operations of the Group 
as a major participant in the Australian 
and UK legal services industry.

The Group’s financial performance and 
position have been, and in the future 
may continue to be, impacted by  
these risks. 

Outlook
The Directors remain convinced of 
the strategic merit of taking a leading 
position in both the Australian and UK 
consumer legal services markets. The 
momentum for further consolidation 
in both markets remains strong and the 
Group is well placed to take advantage 
of that trajectory given its position, 
brand strength and the breadth of  
its offering. 

Risks
Achievement of the business strategy 
and objectives could be impacted by 
a number of risks. Those risks could, 
individually or together, have an adverse  
effect on the achievement of our 
objectives and associated prospects.

Risk is an accepted part of doing 
business and the Group recognises  
the importance of, and is committed  
to, embedding proactive risk 
management strategies, capabilities 
and culture across the Group. 
The identification, mitigation and 
management of material risks ensures, 
where possible, the viability and 
sustainability of our business.

As part of its management processes 
and operating cycle, the Group 
regularly reviews material business 
risks, as well as plans to mitigate these 
risks and discusses these plans with  
the Board. 

Set out below are the principal risks 
and uncertainties associated with the 
Group that could possibly impact 
the achievement of our strategy and 
objectives. The risks and uncertainties 
are not listed in order of significance 
and do not comprise every risk we 
encounter in conducting our business 
or every risk that may affect the 
achievement of our strategy and 
objectives. Rather, they are the most 
significant risks that we believe we 
should be monitoring and seeking  
to mitigate or otherwise manage  
at this point in time.

Slater and Gordon Limited  19

Annual Report 2016Financial Statements

21  Directors’ Report

49  Auditor’s Independence Declaration

50  Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and  Other  

Comprehensive Income for the Year Ended 30 June 2016

51  Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 30 June 2016

52  Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity for the Year Ended 30 June 2016

53  Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows for the Year Ended 30 June 2016

54  Notes to the Financial Statements for the Year Ended 30 June 2016

96  Directors’ Declaration

97 

Independent Auditor’s Report

99  Additional ASX Information

100  Corporate Directory

20  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016

 
Directors’ Report 

The  Directors  present  their  report,  together  with  the  financial  report  of  the  consolidated  entity  consisting  of  Slater  and 
Gordon Limited (“the Company”) and its controlled entities (jointly referred to as “the Group”), for the financial year ended 
30  June  2016  and  the  auditor’s  report  thereon.  This  financial  report  has  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  Australian 
Accounting  Standards.  Compliance  with  Australian  Accounting  Standards  ensures  compliance  with  International 
Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”). 

Directors 

The directors in office at any time during the financial year and up to the date of this report are: 
•  John Skippen – Chair 
•  Andrew Grech – Group Managing Director 

• 

Ian Court 

•  Ken Fowlie – Chief Executive Officer, UK  
•  Erica Lane 
•  Rhonda O’Donnell 
•  James M. Millar (appointed 1 December 2015) 

Details of the skills, experience, expertise and special responsibilities of each Director are set out in the “Information on 
Directors and Company Secretaries” section of this report. 

Principal Activities 

The  principal  activity  of  the  Group  during  the  financial  year  was  the  operation  of  legal  practices  in  Australia  and  the 
United Kingdom  (“UK”). Following the acquisition of  various business assets from Quindell Plc  on 29 May 2015, which 
were rebranded as Slater Gordon Solutions (“SGS”), activities have expanded to include other services complementary 
to the processing and resolution of personal injury claims in the UK.   

Results 

The loss after income tax of the Group was $1,017.6 million (2015 restated: net profit after tax of $62.4 million). 

Review of Operations 

The review of operations is contained in the Operating and Financial Review report as set out on pages 11-19. 

Significant Changes in the State of Affairs 

There have been no significant changes in the state of affairs of the Group other than those disclosed in the Operating 
and Financial Review report.   

Events Subsequent to Reporting Date 

There have not been any matters or circumstances that have significantly affected, or may significantly affect, the results 
reported in the financial statements. 

Likely Developments 

The Group’s core strategy is to lead the consolidation of the consumer legal services market in Australia and the UK and 
to participate in adjacent markets where to do so complements its legal services offering.   

Having established critical mass in both markets in which it operates, the Group aims to deliver sustainable shareholder 
returns  through  a  business  strategy  built  on  organic  growth  and  operational  improvement.    From  an  operational 
perspective, this involves the continued strengthening of the Group’s current market leading position in the consumer law 
market  as  well  as  optimising  business  performance  from  its  other  service  lines.    The  current  focus  of  the  senior 
management team is executing a performance improvement programme across the business to improve profitability and 
cash flow and reduce debt.  

Environmental Regulation 

The Group’s operations are not subject to any significant environmental regulations or laws in Australia or the UK. 

Environmental, Social and Corporate Governance 

Pursuant  to  ASX  Corporate  Governance  Principle  and  Recommendation  7.4,  which  provides  that  companies  disclose 
any  material  exposure  to  economic,  environmental  or  social  sustainability  risks,  the  Company  has  conducted  an 
assessment of material sustainability issues.  Having undertaken a review of the company’s key ESG risks, the Company 
commenced a thorough review, with reference to the aspects and indicators tabled in the Global Reporting Initiatives ‘G4 
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines’. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 12 

Slater and Gordon Limited  21

Annual Report 2016 
 
Directors’ Report 

Dividend Paid, Recommended and Declared 

Pursuant to the amended Syndicated Facility Agreement executed on 1 May 2016 the Company has not declared or paid 
any dividends in respect of the 30 June 2016 financial year.  

The dividends paid and declared since the start of the financial year are as follows: 

Dividends on ordinary shares  
No interim dividend paid in 2016 (2015: 3.50 cents per share, partially franked 
(40%) at the tax rate of 30%) 

Final dividend (partially franked (40%) at the tax rate of 30% for the financial year 
ended 30 June 2015: 5.50 cents) (2014: 5.00 cents per share, fully franked at the 
tax rate of 30%)  

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 

- 

7,341 

19,330 

19,330 

10,279 

17,620 

Dividend Reinvestment Plan 

Since  27  February  2013,  the  Company  has  had  in  place  a  Dividend  Reinvestment  Plan  (“DRP”)  to  allow  eligible 
shareholders to reinvest their dividends in further Company shares. The DRP was active for the interim and final dividend 
declared for the financial year ended 30 June 2015.   

Share Options 

Other than the 2.3m share options and 1.2m performance rights granted to the Group Chief Financial Officer on 5 August 
2016  as  part  of  his  Board  approved  retention  plan  (refer  section  4.5  in  the  Remuneration  report),  no  options  over 
unissued shares or interests in the Company were granted during or since the end of the financial year.  There were no 
options outstanding at the end of the financial year.  

An equity incentive plan (“EIP”) was established in November 2014 to provide annual equity incentives to selected senior 
executives.  Pursuant  to  the  EIP  0.5m  performance  rights  were  granted  in  the  prior  year  which  are  subject  to  vesting 
performance hurdles and continuing service (refer to Remuneration report for further details). 

Indemnification and Insurance of Directors and Officers and Auditors 

During  the  financial  year,  the  Group  has  provided  an  indemnity  or  entered  an  agreement  to  indemnify,  and  paid 
insurance  premiums  for  a  twelve-month  period  in  respect  of  directors,  officers  and  the  company  secretary  of  the 
Company against a liability brought against such an officer. 

Further  disclosure  required  under  section  300(9)  of  the  Corporations  Act  2001  is  prohibited  under  the  terms  of  the 
contract. 

The Company has agreed (in certain circumstances) to indemnify its auditors, Ernst & Young, as part of the terms of its 
audit engagement agreement. No payment has been made to indemnify Ernst & Young during or since the financial year. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 13 

22  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretary 

The skills, experience, expertise and special responsibilities of each person who has been a Director of the Company at 
any time during or since the end of the financial year is provided below, together with details of the company secretaries 
as at the year end. 

John Skippen 
ACA 

Chair 
Non-Executive Director 

Experience 
John has been a Board member since 2010 and Chair of the Board since 2012. 

in 

financial,  public  company  and  retail  experience  and  skills 

John  has  over  30  years’  experience  as  a  chartered  accountant  and  was  the  former 
Executive  Finance  Director  of  Harvey  Norman  Holdings  Ltd.  John  brings  to  the  Board 
financial 
extensive 
management, general management, mergers and acquisitions and strategy. 
Other Current Directorships 
Non-Executive Director of Flexigroup Limited (ASX: FLX) (appointed November 2006) 
Non-Executive  Director  of  Super  Retail  Group  Ltd  (ASX:  SUL)  (appointed  September 
2008)  
Former Directorships 
Non-Executive Director of Emerging Leaders Investment Ltd (2010-2014) 
Special Responsibilities 
Chair – Board (current) 
Member – Audit, Compliance and Risk Management Committee (current) 
Chair – Nomination Committee (appointed 1 July 2015 – current) 

Andrew Grech 

LLB MAICD 

Group Managing Director 

Experience 

Andrew joined Slater and Gordon in 1994 and was appointed Managing Director in 2000. 
Before being appointed Managing Director, Andrew worked in most of Slater and Gordon’s 
litigation practice areas, across both high profile class actions and individual compensation 
claims.  Andrew  brings  to  the  Board  extensive  experience  as  a  legal  practitioner  and  law 
firm manager. 

Other Current Directorships 

None 

Former Directorships  

None 

Other Positions 

Member of the Advisory Council of the Melbourne Law School (2014 – current) 

Special Responsibilities 

Group Managing Director 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 14 

Slater and Gordon Limited  23

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretary (continued) 

Ken Fowlie 

Experience 

LLB BCom (NSW)  

MSc (with distinction) (LBS) 

MAICD 

Executive Director 

Ken  joined  the  Company  in  1995  and  was  appointed  an  Executive  Director  of  the 
Company in 2003. 

Ken  has  extensive  litigation  experience  particularly  in  claims  for  sufferers  of  asbestos 
related illness  (including  acting for the Australian  Council  of Trade Unions (“ACTU”) and 
asbestos support groups in negotiations with James Hardie) and large, multi-party group 
and representative actions. Ken brings to the Board a unique operational perspective in a 
number of the Group’s key strategic areas. As an Australian legal practitioner with close to 
20  years’ experience and qualifications and a strong interest in economics and business 
management,  Ken  contributes  skills  in  legal  practice,  legal  practice  management,  risk 
management,  financial  analysis,  financial  reporting  and  mergers  and  acquisitions.  Ken 
was appointed Head of Australia in July 2013 and until May 2015 was responsible for the 
overall  management  of  the  Slater  and  Gordon  Australian  operation.    In  May  2015  Ken 
was appointed Chief Executive Officer - UK, incorporating Slater Gordon Solutions. 

Other Current Directorships 

None 

Former Directorships  

None 

Special Responsibilities 

Chief Executive Officer – UK 

Ian Court 

FAICD 

Non-Executive Director 

Experience 

Ian was appointed a Director of the Company in 2007 prior to the Company listing on the 
Australian Securities Exchange. 

Ian  has  extensive  experience  as  a  senior  executive  and  non-executive  director  in  a 
diverse  range  of  companies  and  industry  sectors,  including  financial  services,  unlisted 
infrastructure,  listed  energy,  superannuation,  private  equity  and  the  property  sector.  Ian 
was  inaugural  president  of  the  Australian  Institute  of  Superannuation  Trustees  (“AIST”).  
Prior executive positions include CEO of Development Australia Funds Management Ltd 
(1998-2004)  and  Executive  Chair  of  Cbus  (1992-1998).    Earlier  in  his  career  he  was  a 
senior industrial officer with the ACTU (1982-1992). Ian brings to the Board expertise and 
skills in finance, financial markets, business strategy, human resources, risk management 
and corporate governance. 

Other Current Directorships 

None 

Former Directorships  

None 

Other Current Positions 

None 

Special Responsibilities 

Member – Audit, Compliance and Risk Management Committee (current) 

Member – Remuneration Committee (appointed 1 July 2015) 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 15 

24  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretary (continued) 

Erica Lane 

Experience 

B App Sc, Grad Dip Comp, 
MBA (Melbourne), 

MBA (Chicago),  

MAICD 

Non-Executive Director 

Erica joined the Board of the Company in 2008.  

Since  2000,  she  has  held  various  appointments  in  funds  management,  investment 
management,  professional  services  and  healthcare  spanning  both  listed  and  non-listed 
environments  and  public  and  private  sectors.  She  is  an  experienced  member  of  Audit 
Committees and has chaired Nomination and Remuneration and IT Committees. 

In  addition  to  Board  appointments,  Erica  consults  extensively  in  the  public  and  private 
sectors at CEO and Board level on a range of business issues. In an executive capacity, 
Erica held senior positions in finance, funds management and insurance at the ANZ bank 
and worked with international consultancy firms. 

Other Current Directorships 

None 

Former Directorships  

Wilson HTM Investment Group Limited (ASX: WIG) – Member, Audit/Risk and Nomination 
and Remuneration Committees (2013-2014) 

Other Positions 

None 

Special Responsibilities 

Chair – Remuneration Committee (appointed 1 July 2015 – current) 

Member – Audit, Compliance and Risk Management Committee (current) 

Rhonda O’Donnell 

Experience 

M App Sc, MBA (Melbourne) 

Rhonda joined the Board of the Company in 2013. 

Non-Executive Director 

Rhonda  has  extensive  experience 
including 
telecommunications, information technology, education, government and utilities.  Rhonda 
has been a successful executive and board member in both the private and public sectors. 
Rhonda has received several industry achievements including the award for the Victorian 
Telstra Business Woman of the Year in 1999. 

international  and 

industries 

local 

in 

Other Current Directorships 

Non-Executive  director,  Catapult  Group 
September 2014) 

International  Ltd  (ASX:  CAT)  (appointed 

Former Directorships  

None 

Other Current Positions 

None 

Other Former Positions 

None 

Special Responsibilities 

Member – Audit, Compliance and Risk Management Committee (current) 

Member – Remuneration Committee (appointed 1 July 2015 – current) 

Member – Nomination Committee (appointed 1 July 2015 – current) 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 16 

Slater and Gordon Limited  25

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretary (continued) 

James M. Millar 

Experience 

BCom (UNSW), FCA, 
FAICD 

Non-Executive Director 

James was appointed a Director of the Company in December 2015. 

James is a former Chief Executive Officer and Oceania Area Managing Partner of Ernst & 
Young (now EY) and was a member of the Ernst & Young Global Board. His career prior 
to the leadership roles at Ernst & Young was as a corporate reconstruction professional.  

In 2012 James was appointed a Member in the General Division of the Order of Australia 
for service to Business & Commerce and for Community Leadership. 

Other Current Directorships 

Non-Executive Director – Fairfax Media Limited (appointed 2012) 

Director – Macquarie Media Ltd (appointed 2015) 

Non-Executive Director – Mirvac Limited (appointed 2009) 

Former Directorships  

Non-Executive Director – Helloworld Limited (2010 – 2016) 

Chair – Fantastic Holdings Limited (2012 – 2014) 

Other Current Positions 

None 

Special Responsibilities 

Chair – Audit, Compliance and Risk Management Committee (current) 

Bryce Houghton 
B.Com 
GCFO and Company 
Secretary 

Experience 
Bryce joined Slater & Gordon as Group Chief Financial Officer in November 2015. He was 
appointed Company Secretary on 23 March 2016. 

Bryce has 30 years of financial management experience with strong technical and treasury 
skills  as well  as substantial CFO experience in  overseeing  and  development  of systems, 
processes  and  resources.    Before  joining  the  Company,  he  served  as  CFO  of  Navitas 
Limited for 10 years, with prior experience as CFO with Evans & Tate Limited and senior 
management  roles  with  Fonterra  Cooperative  Group  and  National  Bank  of  New  Zealand 
and Price Waterhouse in New Zealand. 

Other Current Directorships 
None 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 17 

26  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Directors’ Meetings 

The number of meetings of the Board of Directors and of each Board committee held  during the financial year and the 
number of meetings attended by each director were: 

Board of Directors 

Audit, Compliance 
and Risk 
Management 
Committee 

Remuneration 
Committee 

Nomination 
Committee 

Special Board 
Committee 

Eligible 
to attend 

Attended 

Eligible 
to attend 

Attended 

Eligible 
to attend 

Attended 

Eligible 
to attend 

Attended 

Eligible 
to attend 

Attended 

A Grech  

K Fowlie 

J Skippen  

I Court  

E Lane 

R O’Donnell 
J Millar (1) 

14 

14 

15 

15 

15 

15 

9 

14 

14 

15 

15 

15 

15 

9 

- 

- 

7 

7 

7 

7 

3 

- 

- 

7 

7 

7 

7 

3 

- 

- 

1 

3 

3 

3 

- 

- 

- 

1 

3 

3 

3 

- 

- 

- 

1 

- 

- 

1 

1 

- 

- 

1 

- 

- 

1 

1 

10 

10 

10 

- 

- 

- 

10 

10 

10 

- 

- 

- 

10 

10 

(1)  James M. Millar was appointed to the Board on 1 December 2015. 

Directors’ Interests in Shares 

Directors’ relevant interests in shares of the Company as at the date of this report are detailed below. 

Ordinary Shares of the Company 

Performance Rights  

A Grech 
I Court 

K Fowlie 

E Lane 

J Skippen 

R O’Donnell 

James M. Millar 

6,750,656 
69,804 

5,646,221 

170,000 

60,000 

25,000 

20,000 

40,000 
- 

16,000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Directors’ Interest in Contracts 

Directors’ interests in contracts are disclosed in Note 6.1 to the financial statements. 

Auditor’s Independence Declaration 

A copy of the auditor’s independence declaration as required under section 307C of the Corporations Act 2001 in relation 
to the audit for the financial year is provided with this report. 

Proceedings on behalf of the Company 

No  person has applied  to the Court  under section 237  of  the Corporations Act 2001 for  leave to  bring  proceedings  on 
behalf  of the  Company,  or to  intervene in  any  proceedings  to which the Company is a  party, for the  purpose  of  taking 
responsibility on behalf of the Company for all or part of those proceedings. 

Non-Audit Services 

Written  approval  for  non-audit  services  is  provided  by  resolution  of  the  Audit,  Compliance  and  Risk  Management 
Committee and approval is notified to the Board of Directors. Non-audit services provided by the auditors of the Group 
during the year are detailed below. The directors are satisfied that the provision of the non-audit services during the year 
by  the  auditor  is  compatible  with  the  general  standard  of  independence  for  auditors  imposed  by  the  Corporations  Act 
2001.    The  nature  and  scope  of  each  type  of  non-audit  service  provided  means  that  auditor  independence  was  not 
compromised. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 18 

Slater and Gordon Limited  27

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Non-Audit Services (continued) 

During  the  year,  the  following  fees  were  paid  or  payable  for  non-audit  services  provided  by  the  current  auditor  of  the 
parent  entity,  Ernst  &  Young(2),  its  related  practices  and  non-related  audit  firms,  and  the  former  auditor  of  the  parent 
entity, Pitcher Partners, its related practices and non-related audit firms: 

Other Advisory  
•  Ernst & Young 
•  Pitcher Partners 
Total remuneration for other advisory 

Total remuneration for non-audit services 

2016  

 $           

257,000 

282,033 

539,033 

555,158 

(2)  Ernst & Young were appointed auditors of the parent entity on 8 December 2015, following resignation of Pitcher Partners. 

Rounding of Amounts 

The amounts contained in the Directors’ Report and financial report have been rounded to the nearest thousand dollars 
(where  rounding  is  applicable)  under  the  option  available  to  the  Company  under  ASIC  Corporations  (Rounding  in 
Financial/Directors’ Reports) Instrument 2016/191.The Company is an entity to which the Class Order applies. 

The Directors’ Report and accompanying Audited Remuneration Report is signed in accordance with a resolution of the 
Directors. 

John Skippen 

Chair 

Melbourne 

29 August 2016 

Andrew Grech 

Group Managing Director 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 19 

28  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report 

Dear Shareholder, 

I am pleased to present our Remuneration Report for the year ended 30 June 2016.  

The  2016  financial  year  has  been  a  year  of  great  challenge  in  light  of  the  events  faced  by  Slater  and  Gordon  Limited 
(“SGH”), the impact this has had on the financial and operating performance of the group, and the effect that this has had 
on our shareholders over the year.  

Over  recent  years  the  Board  has  reviewed  the  remuneration  strategy  for  the  executive  key  management  personnel 
(“KMP”)  to  align  remuneration  and  reward  with  performance.  The  review  in  2015  was  undertaken  using  a  comparator 
group  of  companies  of  similar  market  capitalisation  at  that  time.  There  is  now  significant  variance  between  the 
comparator group and the current market capitalisation of SGH. The Board will continue to monitor the relativity of the 
Company’s  remuneration  strategy  with  the  market,  company  performance,  the  need  to  retain  key  executives,  and 
alignment of reward. 

The review took into account the typical market approach to rewarding senior executives, but also recognised the unique 
challenges facing SGH in the short to medium term. Notwithstanding these issues, it is important that we continue to be 
able to attract and retain key personnel with the necessary skills and experience to drive the company forward.  

The following sets out the key decisions and  outcomes  that occurred  during FY16  as a result of  the application  of the 
remuneration policy previously established by the Board: 

•  During 2015, the Board fees were reviewed. The review used a comparator group of companies of a similar market 
capitalisation to SGH at that time. Subsequently, fees for the Chair and Non-Executive Directors were adjusted from 
1 July 2015. In addition, the increase in the Annual Fee Pool was approved by shareholders at the AGM in November 
2015.  The  Board  will  continue  to  monitor  the  fee  structure  taking  into  account  comparisons  to  market  and  the 
workload of board members during this period of significant change for SGH (section 3.2). 

•  Two of the current executive KMP received a STI payment for FY16. These were for specific performance outcomes 
which  the  Board  determined  supported  these  payments  (section  4.4.1).  The  majority  of  executive  KMP  did  not 
receive any STI payment for FY16. 

•  Consistent  with the remuneration  policy  detailed in the FY15  Remuneration  Report, the Board  approved and made 
offers  of  Performance  Rights  to  executive  KMP.  However,  due  to  the  changing  circumstances  for  SGH,  these 
performance rights were not granted and the allocation was cancelled (section 4.4.2). 

•  The Group Chief Financial Officer (“GCFO”) commenced employment with SGH on 30 November 2015. He has been 
a  key  contributor  to  the  successful  negotiation  of  the  Syndicated  Facility  Agreement,  and  will  be  central  to  the 
management  of  SGH’s  financial  performance  over  future  years.  Therefore,  the  Board  determined  that  it  is  in  the 
interest of shareholders and SGH that it offer the GCFO a revised reward structure focused on his retention with the 
business and the alignment of his remuneration with SGH performance (section 4.5).  

• 

In  line  with  developing  practice  in  corporate  governance,  in  June  2016  the  Board  approved  the  introduction  of  a 
clawback policy. This policy will apply from FY17 and applies to executive KMP. The policy enables SGH to clawback 
certain  elements  of  an  executive's  remuneration  if  there  has  been  a  misstatement  of  SGH’s  financial  statements 
which results in the executive receiving a reward which exceeds the outcome that would have been achieved had the 
misstatement not been made (section 4.7.1) 

•  Two  executive  KMP,  being  the  Chief  Executive  Officer  UK  and  the  Group  Chief  Operating  Officer  received 

remuneration increases effective from 1 July 2015 in recognition of their expanded roles (section 4.9.1). 

Taking  into  consideration  the  performance  of  the  Company  over  FY16,  the  Board  considers  that  the  remuneration 
framework  has  resulted  in  outcomes  that  are  in  line  with  its  purpose,  in  particular,  in  relation  to  at  risk  remuneration.  
Existing remuneration polices will be reviewed in FY17 to ensure that the remuneration policies continue to support the 
achievement of improved performance. 

For a more fulsome analysis of these matters, please see the enclosed Remuneration Report.  

Signed:   

Erica Lane 

Chair, Remuneration Committee 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 20 

Slater and Gordon Limited  29

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

Section  Title 

1.0 

Introduction 

Description 

Describes the scope of the Remuneration Report and the individual Board and 
executive key management personnel (“KMP”) whose remuneration details are 
disclosed. 

2.0 

3.0 

Remuneration 
Governance 

Describes the role of the Board and the Remuneration Committee (“RC”), and the use 
of remuneration consultants when making Board and executive KMP remuneration 
decisions. 

Non-Executive Director 
Remuneration 

Provides details regarding the fees paid to Non-executive Directors (“NEDs”). 

4.0 

Executive Remuneration 

Outlines the principles applied to executive KMP remuneration decisions and the 
framework used to deliver the various components of remuneration, including 
explanation of the performance and remuneration linkages.  

5.0 

6.0 

Employee Share Scheme 
and Other Share 
Information 

Provides details regarding the Group’s employee equity plans including the information 
required by the Corporations Act 2001 and applicable accounting standards. 

Service Contracts and 
Employment Agreements 

Provides details regarding the contractual arrangements between the Group and the 
executive KMP whose remuneration details are disclosed. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 21 

30  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

1. 

Introduction 

The  Group  is  a  leading  international  consumer  law  firm  employing  4,640  people  across  more  than  86  locations  in 
Australia and the United Kingdom. Our mission is to provide people with easier access to world class legal services. The 
Board  has  adopted  contemporary  executive  remuneration  strategies  to  reward  executives  fairly  in  a  competitive 
environment.  Policies  are  also  flexible  enough  to  enable  Slater  and  Gordon  (“SGH”)  to  attract,  motivate  and  retain 
competent executives in a number of locations. 

The  Board’s  philosophy  and  approach  to  executive  remuneration  has  been  to  balance  fair  remuneration  for  skills  and 
expertise with a risk and reward framework that supports sustainable growth.  

The remuneration  policies in respect  of SGH  executive Key  Management  Personnel  (“KMP”) are reviewed  annually. A 
central  success  factor  for  SGH  is  the  capability,  motivation  and  performance  of  its  staff.  The  past  year  has  been 
challenging  for  SGH  given  the  significant  decline  in  shareholder  value  and  the  renegotiation  of  the  Group’s  financing 
arrangements.  This  environment  has  had  a  direct  impact  on  the  reward  of  executive  KMP,  many  of  whom  are  also 
significant shareholders. Within  this context,  the  Board believes SGH’s approach to  remuneration is balanced, fair and 
equitable. SGH has balanced the need for the conservative approach in recognition of the current challenges, with the 
need to retain, reward and motivate the executive team who are central to driving the transformation of the business. 

In reviewing remuneration for the Board and executive KMP in 2015, the Board received advice and recommendations 
from  an  independent  consultant.  At  the  time  SGH’s  remuneration  policy  was  benchmarked  against  a  peer  group  of 
similar size companies. Since then, there has been a  decline in the  value of the company versus this benchmark. The 
Board  has  taken  a  long  term  approach  to  managing  remuneration,  and  will  factor  in  relevant  market  information  into 
future  remuneration  decisions.  Central  to  this  is  to  ensure  that  the  remuneration  policy  is  aligned  with  the  business 
priorities necessary to undertake the transformation and achievement of financial performance targets.  

1.1.  Scope 

This  Remuneration  Report  sets  out  the  remuneration  arrangements  in  place  for  the  Board  and  executive  KMP  of  the 
Group  during  FY16,  in  accordance  with  the  relevant  provisions  of  the  Corporations  Act  2001  and  the  applicable 
accounting standard requirements. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 22 

Slater and Gordon Limited  31

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

1.2.  Key Management Personnel (“KMP”) 

KMP have authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Group and comprise the 
NED and executive KMP (being the two (2) executive directors and other senior executives named in this report). Details 
of the KMP as at year end are set out in the table below: 

Name 

Title 

Change during FY16 

Country of 
Residence 

Non-Executive Directors 

John Skippen 

Chair of the Board, Member – Audit 
Compliance and Risk Management 
Committee (ACRMC), Chair – 
Nomination Committee, Non-
Executive Director 

No change. Full year 

Australia 

James M. Millar 

Chair – ACRMC, Member – 
Nomination Committee, Non-
Executive Director 

Commenced as a Non-Executive Director.  
Appointed as Chair of ACRMC effective on 
15 December 2015 

Australia 

Erica Lane 

Ian Court 

Rhonda O’Donnell 

Executive Directors 

Chair – Remuneration Committee, 
Member – ACRMC, Non-Executive 
Director 

Member – ACRMC, Member – 
Remuneration Committee, Non-
Executive Director 

Member – Remuneration 
Committee, Member –  Nomination 
Committee, Member – ACRMC, 
Non-Executive Director 

No change. Full year 

Australia 

Resigned as Chair of ACRMC on 15 
December 2015 

Australia 

No change. Full year 

Australia 

Andrew Grech 

Group Managing Director 

No change. Full year 

Ken Fowlie 

Chief Executive Officer, UK 

No change. Full year 

Australia 

United 
Kingdom 

Other Executive KMP 

Bryce Houghton 

Group Chief Financial Officer 

Commenced on 30 November 2015 

Australia 

Hayden Stephens 

Chief Executive Officer, General 
Law 

No change. Full year 

Australia 

Felicity Pantelidis 

Group Chief Operating Officer 

Changed from Chief Operating Officer, to 
Group Chief Operating Officer on 1 July 2015  

Australia 

Former Executive KMP 

Wayne Brown 

Group Chief Financial Officer 

Neil Kinsella 

Head of General Law, UK 

Ceased as KMP on 30 November 2015 and 
ceased employment on 6 May 2016 

Australia 

Changed from Head of UK to Head of M&A 
(UK), October 2015.  Ceased employment on 
5 February 2016 

United 
Kingdom 

Cath Evans 

Chief Executive Officer, Personal 
Injury Law 

No change. Full year  
Ceased employment on 30 June 2016  

Australia 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 23 

32  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

2.  Remuneration Governance  

This section of the Remuneration Report describes the role of the Board and the Remuneration Committee (“RC”), and 
the use of remuneration consultants when making Board and executive KMP remuneration decisions. 

2.1.  Role of the Board and the Remuneration Committee  

The Board has overall responsibility for SGH’s remuneration strategy and policy. Consistent with this responsibility, the 
Board has established the RC, comprised solely of independent NEDs. 

The role of the RC is set out in its Charter, which is reviewed annually and was last revised and approved by the Board 
in 2015. Prior to 1 July 2015, there was a combined Nominations and Remuneration Committee of the Board which was 
reconfigured into two (2) separate committees effective from 1 July 2015. 

During the reporting year, the RC’s role included: 

•  ensuring that appropriate procedures exist to assess the remuneration levels of the Chairman, other NEDs, executive 

KMP, Board committees, and the Board as a whole; 

•  ensuring that SGH meets the requirements of the ASX Corporate Governance Council’s Guidelines, including gender 

diversity principles and recommendations; 

•  ensuring that SGH adopts, monitors and applies appropriate remuneration policies and procedures; 

•  ensuring  that  reporting  disclosures  related  to  remuneration  meet  the  Board’s  disclosure  objectives  and  all  relevant 

legal requirements; 

•  developing,  maintaining  and  monitoring  appropriate  talent  management  programs  including  succession  planning, 

recruitment, development; and retention and termination policies and procedures for senior management; and 

•  developing, maintaining and monitoring appropriate post-employment and other benefit arrangements for the Group. 

The RC’s role and interaction with Board, internal and external advisors for FY16, is illustrated below: 

The Board 

Reviews, applies 
judgement and, as 
appropriate, 
approves the RC’s 
recommendations. 

Remuneration 
Committee 

The RC operates under 
the delegated authority 
of the Board. 
The RC is empowered 
to source any internal 
resources and obtain 
external independent 
professional advice it 
considers necessary to 
enable it to make 
recommendations to 
the Board. 

External consultants 

Provide advice on remuneration policy, 
composition and quantum of 
remuneration components for executive 
KMP, and performance targets. 

Provide advice on remuneration policy 
in respect of NEDs. 

Internal resources 
Develop and design talent 
management policies and practices 
including post-employment benefits. 

Design features of employee and 
executive STI and LTI plan awards, 
including setting of performance and 
other vesting criteria. 

Further  information  on  the  RC’s  role,  responsibilities  and  membership  will  be  contained  in  the  SGH  Corporate 
Governance  Statement.  The  RC  terms  of  reference  can  also  be  viewed  in  the  Governance  section  of  the  Company’s 
website, www.slatergordon.com.au. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 24 

Slater and Gordon Limited  33

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

2.2.  Use of Remuneration Consultants  

During  FY16,  remuneration  consultancy  contracts  were  entered  into  by  SGH  and  accordingly  the  disclosures required 
under section 300A(1)(h) of the Corporations Act 2001 are set out as follows: 

Advisor / Consultant – FY16 

Services provided 

Crichton & Associates Pty Limited, 
Independent Remuneration 
Consultant 

1.  Benchmark remuneration, 

assessment and report in respect 
of the Board and executive KMP 

Remuneration consultant for the 
purpose of the Corporations Act 

Yes 

2.  Review of FY16 equity 

allocations 

3.  Drafting of FY15 Remuneration 

Report 

The Group has an established protocol for procuring advice relating to KMP remuneration. The protocol requires that the 
Board  provides  written  instructions  to  the  consultant  with  a  specified  scope  of  works  and  requiring  that  the  consultant 
report all findings to the Board in writing free of any interference from executive KMP. During FY16, the Board received a 
written report containing remuneration recommendations from Crichton & Associates. 

The Board is satisfied that the remuneration information provided was free from any such undue influence from executive 
KMP, as the protocol for procuring advice relating to KMP remuneration has been followed.  

Crichton & Associates was paid $68,232 for all remuneration services provided during FY16. 

3.  Non-Executive Director (“NED”) Remuneration 

3.1.  NED Remuneration  

Principle 

Fees are set by reference to key 
considerations 

Comment 

  Fees for NEDs  are  based  on  the nature of the NEDs  work, their  responsibilities 
and  anticipated  time  commitment.  The  remuneration  paid  is  intended  to  reflect 
the complexity of the business and its geographic spread. In determining the level 
of  fees,  independent  survey  data  on  comparable  companies  (ASX  listed 
companies of similar size) was considered  at the time of the review. NEDs  fees 
are  recommended  by  the  RC  and  determined  by  the  Board.  Shareholders 
approve the aggregate amount available for the remuneration of NEDs.  

Remuneration is structured to 
preserve independence whilst 
creating alignment  

  To preserve independence and impartiality, NEDs are not entitled to any form of 
incentive  payments  including  options  and  the  level  of  their  fees  is  not  set  with 
reference to measures of SGH’s performance. 

Aggregate Board and committee 
fees are approved by shareholders 

  An increase in the aggregate board fee pool was approved by shareholders at the 
2015 AGM. The total amount of fees paid to NEDs in FY16 was $725,358 in total 
which is 76% of the approved aggregate annual fee pool. 

3.2.  NED Fees and Other Benefits  

In  2015,  the  Board  sought  independent  advice  in  reviewing  the  fees  for  the  Chair  and  NEDs.  The  review  used  a 
comparator  group  of  companies  of  a  similar  market  capitalisation  to  SGH  at  that  time,  and  subsequently  fees  were 
adjusted for the Chair and NEDs from 1 July 2015 as detailed in the following table. The increase in the Annual Fee Pool 
was  approved  by  shareholders  at  the  AGM  in  November  2015.  The  Board  will  continue  to  monitor  the  fees  structure 
taking into account comparison to market and the substantial increase in workload of board members during this period 
of significant change for SGH. Committee fees are not paid to the Chair of the Board. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 25 

34  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

Elements 

Details 

Board / Committee 

Board Chair fee¹ 

Fees per annum –  FY16 

Board NED base fee¹ 

Committee Fees 

Audit, Compliance and Risk Management 
•  Chair 
•  Member 

Nomination Committee 
•  Chair 
•  Member 

Remuneration Committee 
•  Chair 
•  Member 

Annual Fee Pool 

Before 
1 July 2015 

From 
1 July 2015 

$158,055 

 $240,000 

$89,565 

 $120,000 

$10,000 
$5,000 

$20,000 
$5,000 

- 
- 

- 
$5,000 

$10,000 
$5,000 

$10,000 
$5,000 

$650,000 

$950,000 

Post-Employment Benefits 

Superannuation 

Other Benefits 

Equity instruments 

Other fees / benefits 

Superannuation contributions have been made in accordance with the Company’s 
statutory obligations 

NEDs  do  not  receive  any  performance  related  remuneration,  options  or 
performance rights 
NEDs receive reimbursement for costs directly related to SGH business 

3.3.  NED Total Remuneration – Actual Paid 

Amounts $ 

John Skippen (Chair) 

James M. Millar 

Ian Court 

Erica Lane 

Rhonda O’Donnell 

Total 

Year 

FY16 

FY15 

FY16 

FY15 

FY16 

FY15 

FY16 

FY15 

FY16 

FY15 

FY16 

FY15 

Short-Term Benefits  Post-Employment Benefits 

Fees  Superannuation Benefits 

221,573 

137,835 

76,396 

- 

117,287 

79,258 

123,608 

97,516 

123,713 

88,384 

662,577 

402,993 

19,308 

24,131 

7,451 

- 

12,526 

27,099 

11,743 

9,259 

11,753 

8,391 

62,781 

68,880 

1 Fees were increased on 1 July 2015 to reflect the additional workload and complexity arising from the SGS acquisition  

Total 

240,881 

161,966 

83,847 

- 

129,813 

106,357 

135,351 

106,775 

135,466 

96,775 

725,358 

471,873 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 26 

Slater and Gordon Limited  35

Annual Report 2016 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.  Executive Remuneration 

4.1.  Executive KMP Remuneration  

The SGH executive remuneration policies are intended to fairly remunerate executives for their contribution to the Group. 
They  are  also  designed  to  attract,  motivate  and  retain  qualified  and  experienced  executives  employed  across  diverse 
businesses  and  geographic  locations.  Fixed  remuneration  components  are  determined  having  regard  to  the  specific 
skills  and  competencies  of  the  executive  KMP  with  reference  to  both  internal  and  external  relativities,  including  local 
market  conditions.  The  ‘at  risk’  components  of  remuneration  consisting  of  both  short  and  long  term  incentives  are 
intended to reward (risk balanced) performance on the achievement of clearly defined targets. The table below describes 
the  Company’s  remuneration  policy  and  preferred  market  positioning  over  the  longer  term.  It  is  recognised  that  the 
current challenges may result in a divergence from this desired state in the short term, however, the Board will continue 
to monitor this policy to maintain market alignment:  

d
e
x
i
F

d
E

Total fixed 
remuneration 
(“TFR”) 
TFR is set based on 
job role, market 
relativities, reflecting 
responsibilities, 
performance, 
qualifications, 
experience and 
geographic location. 

Short-term 
incentives  
(“STI”) 
STI performance 
criteria are set by 
reference to a 
Balanced Scorecard 
methodology, with KPI 
including financial and 
operational, people 
and culture and clients 
and development. 

Long-term incentives 
(“LTI”) 
LTI targets are linked 
to both the Group’s 
internal EPS growth 
and external relative 
TSR outperformance 
measures. 

k
s
i
r

t

A

Remuneration 
will be 
delivered as: 

Base salary plus any 
fixed elements related 
to local markets, 
including 
superannuation or 
equivalents. 

Strategic 
Intent and 
Market 
Positioning 

Align TFR to the 
median of an agreed 
peer group of 
Australian companies 
recognizing the need 
to attract and retain 
the necessary critical 
skills to lead the 
business. 

Executive KMP 
receive the short term 
incentive in cash (after 
tax) at the end of the 
performance period. 
No STI deferral 
applies to executive 
KMP. 

In FY16, equity was 
offered as 
performance rights, 
subject to performance 
and service for three 
years from grant date. 
However, the equity 
was not granted to 
executive KMP due to 
the changed 
circumstances of 
SGH. 
Refer section 4.4.2 

Position the proportion 
of STI relative to TTR 
so that the combined 
TFR + STI aligns with 
the third quartile of the 
agreed peer group. 
Actual amounts linked 
to specific annual 
company performance 
targets set by the 
Board.   

LTI is intended to 
reward executive KMP 
for sustainable long-
term performance 
aligned to shareholder 
interests. LTI 
allocations are 
conservatively 
positioned relative to 
the approved 
comparator group. 

Total target 
remuneration 
(“TTR”) is set 
by reference 
to the 
relevant 
geographic 
market. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 27 

36  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.2.  Remuneration Composition Mix 

The Group  endeavours  to provide an appropriate and  competitive mix  of remuneration components  balanced between 
fixed and at risk and paid in both cash and deferred equity. As stated in the FY15 Remuneration Report a review of the 
remuneration arrangements was conducted in FY15 and the Board determined that the KMP were conservatively valued 
relative to the market and that the remuneration should  be increased with a particular focus on the variable  or “at risk” 
elements  of  their  reward  strategy.  Accordingly,  the  proposed  remuneration  mix  for  the  KMP  was  re-profiled  with  a 
heavier weighting on the variable pay aspects with the desired position proposed to be: 

Target Remuneration Mix for FY16  

Position 

TFR as a % of TTR 

Group Managing Director 

Other Executive KMP 

48% 

50% – 60% 

STI (at target) 
as a % of TTR 

19% 

16% – 25% 

LTI (at target) 
as a % of TTR 

33% 

23% – 33% 

However, as has been previously stated the performance of the SGH group has been lower than expectations and as a 
result  the  variable  pay  elements  for  FY16  have  been  much  lower  and  in  some  cases  not  provided  at  all.  This  has 
impacted the overall remuneration mix in FY16 and is illustrated as follows: 

Actual Remuneration Mix for FY16  

Position 

TFR as a % of TTR 

Group Managing Director 

Other Executive KMP(1) 

1.  Excludes former KMPs 

STI (at target) 
as a % of TTR 

27% 

69% 

66% to 77% 

21% to 33% 

LTI (at target) 
as a % of TTR 

4% 

0% to 4% 

Executive KMP remuneration is delivered on a cascading basis. This remuneration mix is designed to ensure executive 
KMP  are  focused  on  delivering  results  over  both  the  short  term  and  the  long  term  if  they  are  to  maximise  their 
remuneration opportunity. The Board believes this approach aligns executive KMP remuneration to shareholder interests 
and market expectations. 

4.3.  Total Fixed Remuneration Explained 

Total fixed remuneration (“TFR”) includes all remuneration and benefits paid to an executive KMP calculated on a total 
employment cost basis. In addition to base salary, selected overseas executives receive benefits that may include health 
insurance, car allowances and relocation allowances. In Australia, retirement benefits are generally paid in line with the 
prevailing  Statutory  Superannuation  Guarantee.  Elsewhere,  retirement  benefits  are  generally  paid  in  line  with  local 
legislation and practice. 

Executive KMP TFR is tested regularly for market competiveness by reference to appropriate independent and externally 
sourced comparable benchmark information. This includes comparable ASX listed companies based on a range of size 
criteria  including  market  capitalisation,  as  well  as  taking  into  account  an  executive’s  responsibilities,  performance, 
qualifications,  experience  and  geographic  location.  In  2015  the  Board  approved  the  remuneration  policy  for  executive 
KMP  based  on  a  benchmark  group  of  companies  with  comparable  market  capitalisation  levels.  Accordingly,  the 
remuneration review in FY16 assessed relativity of remuneration for the executive KMP against that peer group and the 
Board  approved  remuneration  levels  relative  to  that  group.  Since  then  the  current  market  capitalisation  of  SGH  has 
changed considerably and would now not be comparable to the other companies in the benchmark peer group based on 
this measure. However, it remains critically important that SGH continues to  be able to  attract and retain the calibre  of 
senior management that would be available to those companies in the peer group.     

TFR adjustments, if any, are made with reference to individual performance, an increase in job role or responsibility, and 
changing market circumstances; as reflected through independent benchmark assessments or promotion. 

Any  adjustments to  executive KMP  remuneration  are approved  by the Board,  based  on  Remuneration Committee  and 
Group Managing Director input and recommendations. 

4.4.  Variable (at risk) Remuneration Explained 

The purpose of variable remuneration is to direct executives’ behaviours towards maximising SGH’s short, medium and 
long-term performance. The key aspects of each component are summarised below: 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 28 

Slater and Gordon Limited  37

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.4.1.  Short-Term Incentives (“STI”) 

Purpose 

The STI arrangements are designed to reward executives for achieving SGH’s strategic 
and  operational  objectives  under  a  Balanced  Scorecard  methodology  with  annual 
performance targets set by the Board at the  beginning of the performance period. The 
STI program is reviewed annually by the Remuneration Committee and approved by the 
Board.  
All STI awarded to the Group Managing Director and other executive KMP are reviewed 
and endorsed by the Remuneration Committee and approved by the Board. 

Performance Targets 

The key performance criteria of the Group’s FY16 STI were as follows:   

Financial  and  Operational  performance  (not  less  than  55%  of  weighting).  Financial 
performance  for  KMP  is  based  on  Group  financial  performance  (Group  EBITDA, 
EBITDA margin, Group cash flow). Operational performance is based on the delivery of 
key elements of Group strategy; 
People and Culture (not less than 30% of weighting). These objectives typically relate 
to organisational planning and development for the Group; and 
Client  and  Development  (not  less  than  15%  of  weighting).  These  objectives  typically 
relate to business improvement initiatives within the Group. 

The mix of performance criteria and the individual key performance indicators may vary 
from year to year depending on the assessed annual performance priorities at the start 
of  the  year.  An  overall  financial  performance  gate  is  applied  to  all  executive  KMP 
awards, unless the Board determines otherwise. 
Any anomalies or discretionary elements are validated and approved by the Board.  

Rewarding Performance 

is  calculated  under  a 

the  performance  criteria  set 

The  achievement  against 
predetermined matrix. 
Validation  of  performance  against  the  measures  set  for  the  Group  Managing  Director 
are  reviewed  and  endorsed  by  the  Remuneration  Committee  and  approved  by  the 
Board.  
Validation of performance against the measures set for the executive KMP is endorsed 
by the Group Managing Director, and then reviewed and endorsed by the Remuneration 
Committee and approved by the Board. 
Any anomalies or discretionary elements are validated and approved by the Board. 

Actual STI awarded for FY16 compared to STI Opportunity 

Executive KMP 

Position 

Target STI 
as a % of 
FY16 TTR 

STI 
awarded 
as a % of 
Target STI 

STI 
forfeited 
for FY16 
as a % of 
Target STI 

Accrued STI 
to be 
awarded in 
FY16 ($) 

Andrew Grech 
Ken Fowlie 
Bryce Houghton 
Hayden Stephens  Chief Executive Officer, General Law 
Felicity Pantelidis  Group Chief Operating Officer 

Group Managing Director 
Chief Executive Officer, UK 
Group Chief Financial Officer 

26.95% 
27.32% 
32.90% 
21.27% 
23.27% 

- 
- 
100% 
- 
75% 

100% 
100% 
- 
100% 
25% 

 -  
 -  
189,600  
 -  
 93,750  

Former Executives 

Wayne Brown 
Neil Kinsella 

Cath Evans 

Group Chief Financial Officer 
Head of General Law, UK 
Chief Executive Officer, Personal 
Injury Law 

- 
23.28% 

- 
- 

100% 
100% 

 -  
 -  

24.96% 

16.67% 

83.33% 

25,000  

Ratings  are  based  on  meeting  or  exceeding  expectations  across  all  areas  of  responsibility.  Recommendations  are 
subject to rigorous moderation by the Remuneration Committee and the Board.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 29 

38  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.4.1  Short-Term Incentives (“STI”) (continued) 

For FY16 two of the current executive KMP received a STI payment: 

•  The current GCFO joined SGH on 30 November 2015. He was paid $100,000 on completion of his probation period 
in  accordance  with  his  employment  agreement.  A  further  $89,600,  being  the  balance  of  this  potential  STI,  was 
awarded to him based on his contribution in finalising the Syndicated Facility Agreement. 

•  The Group Chief Operating Office (“GCOO”) was awarded 75% of her STI based on her performance as project lead 

of the company refinancing exercise, and other major initiatives to drive group efficiencies. 

At the time of publication of the Remuneration Report for FY15, the Board had not finalised the actual STI payments to 
executive  KMP  for  that  year.  Provisional  STI  values  were  reported.  As  a  result  of  the  moderation  process  the  STI 
payment for Mr N Kinsella changed from the provisional value of $40,000 to an actual value of $28,000, and the FY15 
STI payment for Ms C Evans increased from the  provisional value  of  $100,000 to  an  actual value  of $125,000. These 
adjustments are reflected in the FY16 Remuneration disclosures for these KMP.  All other payments were as reported for 
FY15. 

4.4.2.  Long-Term Incentives (“LTI”) 

The  LTI  provides  an  annual  opportunity  for  executive  KMP  and  other  selected  executives  (based  on  their  ability  to 
influence  and  execute  strategy)  to  receive  an  equity  award,  that  is  intended  to  align  a  portion  of  executives’  overall 
remuneration to shareholder value over the longer term. All LTI awards are deferred for three years and remain at risk 
and  subject  to  forfeiture  or  lapse  until  vesting.  Company  performance  must  meet  or  exceed  earnings  (“EPS”)  growth 
rates and/or relative TSR performance hurdles over the vesting period. 

Purpose 

To  align  executive  KMP  remuneration  opportunity  with  shareholder  value  and  to 
encourage retention. 

Types of Equity Awarded  Until  FY14,  LTI  was  provided  under  the  Employee  Ownership  Plan  (“EOP”).  The 
Executive  Equity  Incentive  Scheme  (“EEIS”)  was  introduced  in  October  2014.  See 
section 5.1 for further details on both plans. 
Under the EEIS, selected senior executives are offered performance rights (being a nil 
exercise price right to fully paid ordinary shares of SGH). 

Time of Grant 

All LTI grants are made after the AGM each year, but based on values determined prior 
to the AGM. 

FY16 Long Term Incentive Plan 

As  described  in  section  4.1  and  4.2,  SGH’s  remuneration  policy  includes  offering  executive  KMP  the  opportunity  to 
participate  in  a  long  term  incentive.  In  accordance  with  the  policy,  an  offer  was  made  to  executive  KMP  in  November 
2015,  and was  accepted  by the  executives invited  to  participate. Subsequently, the  granting of the  performance rights 
was placed on hold pending announcement to the market on the financial performance of SGH. No grant of performance 
rights was made to executive KMP during FY16 and the plan for that year was subsequently cancelled, as the Board did 
not consider the design of the plan was aligned with the new medium to long term objectives of the Group.  

An  expense  amount  for  the  FY16  plan  is  included  in  the  remuneration  tables  consistent  with  AASB  2  accounting 
treatment, however, no value was received by the executives for this offer. It is the intention of the Board that a revised 
plan will be offered during FY17. 

FY15 Long Term Incentive Plan 

The first allocation of Performance Rights under the LTI was made in FY15 and testing of the vesting conditions will not 
apply until September 2017, but are reviewed at each reporting period, consistent with AASB 2. Details of the plan are 
provided in the following table: 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 30 

Slater and Gordon Limited  39

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

Performance 
Hurdles and 
Vesting 
Schedule 

The  FY15  equity  grants  to  the  Group  Managing  Director  and  other  executive  KMP  are  in  two  equal 
tranches assigned 50% to compound annual growth rate (“CAGR”) in EPS and 50% subject to ranking 
of TSR against the S&P/ASX 300 (excluding resources). The FY15 equity grants awarded to the Group 
Managing Director and other executive KMP are tested against the performance hurdles set, at the end 
of  three  financial  years.  If  the  performance  hurdles  are  not  met  at  the  vesting  date  the  performance 
rights lapse. The performance conditions applying to the FY15 grant are as follows: 

Executive Directors Only 
Compound annual growth in EPS (3 years) 

All other Executive KMP 
Compound annual growth in EPS (3 years) 

Performance¹ 

% of equity to vest 

Performance 

% of equity to vest 

< 10% 

10% to 15% 

> 15% 

0% 

< 7% 

0% 

50% to 100% pro-rata 

7% to 10% 

50% to 100% pro-rata 

100% 

> 10% 

100% 

¹ FY14 Basic EPS is the base. The Board imposed higher performance expectations on the two (2) Executive Directors. A slightly 
lower hurdle was determined for other executive KMP to, in part, acknowledge the relatively small dollar value of the opportunity in 
this initial grant. In future, hurdles for all executive KMP will be the same. 

Ranking of SGH TSR against S&P/ASX 300 (excluding resources) (3 years) 

Performance 

< 50th percentile 

% of equity to vest 

0% 

50th to 75th percentile 

50% to 100% pro-rata 

> 75th percentile 

100% 

Performance rights  vest  if  the  time restrictions and relevant performance  hurdles  are met. The  Board 
must approve any special provisions, in accordance with Company policies, in the event of termination 
of employment or a change of control. After the three year vesting schedule, any unvested performance 
rights lapse. 
No dividends are attached to performance rights.  

Dividends 

Voting Rights  There are no voting rights attached to performance rights (prior to vesting). 

Retesting 

There is no retesting of performance hurdles under LTI. 

LTI 
Allocation  

The  size  of  individual  LTI  grants  for  the  Group  Managing  Director  and  other  executive  KMP  is 
determined  in  accordance  with  the  Board  approved  remuneration  strategy  mix.  See  section  4.2  for 
further details. 
The  target  LTI  dollar  value  for  each  executive  was  converted  to  performance  rights  according  to  LTI 
allocation  values  independently  determined  based  on  the  gross  contract  value  of  the  relevant  equity 
instrument and based on a Black-Scholes-Merton pricing model without discounting for service or EPS 
and TSR performance hurdles: 
Performance right allocation = LTI dollar value/Black-Scholes-Merton value before service or EPS and 
TSR performance discounts. 

4.5.  Group Chief Financial Officer Remuneration 

4.5.1.  GCFO – Retention Plan 

The current Group Chief Financial Officer (“GCFO”) is key to the achievement of the operational and strategic objectives 
of SGH. Accordingly, in FY16 the Board approved a “one off” Retention Plan to the GCFO that includes two components, 
both of which are subject to performance and restriction conditions: 

•  An allocation of 1.2m Performance Rights; and  

•  An allocation of 2.3m Options. 

The key details of the Retention Plan are as follows: 

Performance Period – From: 1 May 2016 to 30 June 2017. 

Performance  Measure  –  Relative  Total  Shareholder  Return  against  the  component  companies  in  the  ASX/S&P  300 
(excluding resources).  

Option Exercise Price of $0.2763, which is based on the VWAP for the 20 business days prior to 1 May 2016 and as 
agreed in the Syndicated Facility Agreement. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 31 

40  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.5.1. GCFO – Retention Plan (continued) 

The following scale shall apply: 

Less than the 50th percentile 
At or above the 50th percentile 
At or above the 75th percentile 

None 
50% (straight-line interpolation between the 50th and 75th percentile) 
100% 

Vesting Conditions – The Performance Rights and Options may vest and be exercised subject to:  

•  The performance measure being achieved at the end of the performance period;  

•  The participant meeting the Service Condition of the plan; and  

•  The Board resolving that the hurdle has been achieved.  

If the vesting conditions are satisfied, then all or some of the Performance Rights or Options will vest. Fifty percent of the 
vested and exercised Performance Rights will be converted to ordinary shares and transferred to the GCFO immediately. 
The remaining 50% of vested and  exercised Performance Rights will be converted to ordinary shares and held in trust 
and cannot be traded until 31 December 2018.  

Vested  Options  may  be  exercised  once  the  performance  hurdle  has  been  achieved,  or  the  GCFO  may  defer  the 
exercising of these Options for up to 3 years from the grant date. When the GCFO elects to exercise some or all of the 
vested Options they will be converted into shares. Fifty percent of the resulting shares may be transferred to the GCFO 
on  exercising  of  the  Options,  with  the  remaining  50%  of  the  resulting  shares  to  be  held  in  trust  to  the  end  of  the 
restriction period on 31 December 2018.  

Any Options that have vested but have not been exercised will lapse 3 years from the grant date. 

If the vesting conditions are not satisfied, the Performance Rights and Options will lapse, and the GCFO will not receive 
any value through this plan.  

The Performance Rights and Options, as noted above, were granted to the GCFO on 5 August 2016. The GCFO will not 
participate in other equity plans that are offered to executive KMP during FY17. 

4.5.2.  GCFO – FY17 STI 

In addition to the retention plan, the Board approved a variation in the structure of the FY17 STI plan for the GCFO as 
shown in the table below. Quarterly results are assessed against performance milestones approved by the Board. These 
will  provide  alignment  between  key  performance  outcomes  for  SGH  and  the  reward  for  the  GCFO.  Any  resulting 
payments are then reviewed by the Remuneration Committee prior to being referred to the Board for approval.  

Period: 

Remuneration Value: 

Assessment 

Quarter 1: 30 September 2016 
Quarter 2: 31 December 2016 
Quarter 3: 31 March 2017 
Quarter 4: 30 June 2017 

4.6.  Remuneration Mix for FY17  

1 July 2016 to 30 June 2017 

$325,000 

Weighting 

20% 
20% 
20% 
40% 

Value ($) 

$65,000 
$65,000 
$65,000 
$130,000 

The current environment  of SGH has changed substantially  since the review  that was  conducted in  2015. While there 
has  been  a  significant  divergence  in  performance  from  the  comparator  group,  and  decline  in  shareholder  value,  the 
remuneration outcomes have been aligned with these changed circumstances. There has been limited STI payments to 
executive  KMP,  and  the  value  of  previous  equity  plan  allocations  are  currently  substantially  below  the  performance 
targets, and are unlikely to provide benefit to these executives. 

SGH  is  now  reviewing  its  remuneration  mix  and  settings  for  FY17  to  achieve  the  balance  between  the  current 
environment,  the  need  to  address  the  immediate  challenges  facing  SGH,  and  the  alignment  of  the  shareholder 
experience and business performance. This needs to be balanced with the ability to attract new talent and to retain key 
staff essential to driving future performance. 

The  objective  of  this  review  is  to  ensure  that  the  remuneration  mix  for  FY17,  and  beyond,  aligns  with  the  overall 
objectives of SGH, and maintains alignment between performance and reward. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 32 

Slater and Gordon Limited  41

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.7.  Other Remuneration Elements and Disclosures relevant to Executive KMP 

4.7.1.  Clawback 

In line with developing practice in corporate governance, in June 2016 the Board approved the introduction of a clawback 
policy.  This  policy  is  in  place  for  FY17  and  applies  to  executive  KMP.  The  policy  enables  SGH  to  clawback  certain 
elements of an executive's remuneration if there has been a misstatement of SGH’s financial statements which results in 
the executive receiving a reward which exceeds the outcome that would have been achieved had the misstatement not 
been made.  The clawback provisions are designed to  further align the interests of KMP with the long-term interests  of 
their company or group and to ensure that excessive risk taking is not rewarded. 

4.7.2.  Hedging and Margin Lending Prohibition 

Directors  and  executive  KMP  must  not  engage  in  dealings  based  on  short  term  fluctuations  in  SGH  securities.  If  a 
Director or executive KMP acquires SGH securities, they should not sell or agree to sell any SGH securities of that class 
for at least 30 days. 

Directors  are  prohibited  from  entering  into  margin  loans  under  the  SGH  Share  Trading  Policy.  Other  executive  KMP 
require  prior  approval  to  enter  into  a  margin  loan  arrangement  where  the  amount  of  shares  mortgaged,  provided  as 
security, lent or charged  to  a financier amounts to 1% or more of the issued capital  in SGH at  the  relevant time.  KMP 
must  notify  the  Company  Secretary  immediately  if  they  are  given  notice  by  their  financier  of  an  intention  to  make  a 
margin call and sell SGH securities during a prohibited trading period.  

Directors and executive KMP must not enter into hedging arrangements in relation to SGH securities that are unvested 
or subject to disposal restrictions or minimum shareholding requirements. 

Equity granted under the Executive Equity Incentive Scheme remains at risk until vested and exercised. It is a specific 
condition  of  grant  that  no  schemes  are  entered  into  by  an  individual  or  their  associates  that  specifically  protect  the 
unvested value of performance rights allocated. 

The Group, in line with good corporate governance, has a Share Trading Policy setting down how and when employees 
may deal in SGH securities. 

The  SGH  Share  Trading  Policy  is  available  on  the  SGH  website  www.slatergordon.com.au  under  the  Firm,  and  then 
Governance tab.  

4.7.3.  Minimum Shareholding Guidelines 

The majority of executive KMP are subject to minimum shareholding requirements under agreements between the seven 
shareholders of the Company prior to listing in 2007. 

Executive KMP subject to these agreements are required to maintain a minimum number of shares that is equivalent to 
the lesser of 20% of the value or 15% of the number of shares issued to them, while they remain a member or employee 
of the Group. 

4.8.  Relationship between the Group’s Performance and Executive KMP Remuneration 

4.8.1.  The Group’s Financial Performance (FY12 to FY16) 

 Company Performance 

2012 

2013 

2014 

2015 
Restated 

2016 

Revenue ($'000) 

        217,704  

          297,963  

   438,228  

     598,185  

908,185 

Profit before tax ($'000) 

            36,494  

            61,341  

95,747  

     85,408  

(1,029,468) 

Profit after tax ($'000) 

            24,992  

            41,521  

 68,236  

       62,374  

(1,017,595) 

Basic earnings per share (cents) 

              16.20  

23.90  

      33.80  

         26.46  

(289.10) 

Diluted earnings per share (cents) 

           15.70  

23.30  

        33.20  

         26.27  

(289.10) 

Dividends per share - paid during 
financial year (cents) 

Total dividends paid during 
financial year ($'000) 

5.80  

6.30  

6.85  

            8.50  

5.50 

              8,786  

            10,647  

13,770  

       17,620  

19,330 

Share price at 30 June ($) 

1.85  

2.78  

5.16  

            3.56  

0.39 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 33 

42  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
               
               
                 
                 
                  
             
                 
                 
                  
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.8.2.  Group Current Year Performance and Relationship to Executive KMP Remuneration  

The  total  of  executive  KMP  remuneration  for  those  executives  that  remained  employed  for  the  full  year  was  lower  in 
FY16 than in FY15. This reflects the low STI payout in FY16. The accrual of LTI Awards in 2015 was small and no LTI 
award will vest earlier than 2017, and then only if the EPS and TSR hurdles are met. The FY16 LTI plan was offered to 
executive KMP, however, this was not granted, and subsequently cancelled due to the changing circumstances of SGH 
during the year. 

Overall, there has been strong alignment between the company performance and the “at risk” reward for executive KMP. 
This is reflected in the limited STI payments, and the decision not to proceed with the LTI equity grant during FY16. 

4.8.3.  Group EPS and TSR Performance and Relationship to Executive KMP Remuneration 

As  explained  in  section  4.1,  SGH’s  remuneration  framework  aims  to  incentivise  executive  KMP  towards  long-term 
sustainable growth and the creation of shareholder value in the short, medium and long- term. This is developed in two 
ways: 

•  Cash STI, which is linked to achievement of performance objectives, including financial measures for the completed 

performance year (as explained in section 4.4.1); and 

•  The FY15 LTI Plan, in the form of performance rights, is linked to compound annual growth in EPS and relative TSR 

performance (as explained in section 4.4.2). 

EPS  (internal)  and  relative  TSR  (external)  are  generally  accepted  proxies  for  creation  of  shareholder  value.  It  is  the 
Board’s intention to review the suitability of these performance criteria and settings on a regular basis to ensure they best 
serve shareholders’ interests. 

The  FY15  plan  is  the  only  active  long-term  incentive  plan  and  utilises  EPS  and  TSR  to  assess  performance,  and  the 
potential vesting of performance rights after the end of FY17. Both these measures are substantially below the level of 
performance required for any performance rights to vest. 

No performance rights vested during FY16. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 34 

Slater and Gordon Limited  43

Annual Report 2016 
.

4
9

.

E
x
e
c
u
t
i

v
e
R
e
m
u
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
T
a
b
e
s

l

D
i
r
e
c
t
o
r
s
’

R
e
p
o
r
t

A
u
d
i
t
e
d
R
e
m
u
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
R
e
p
o
r
t

(
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)

.

4
9

.

1

.

E
x
e
c
u
t
i

v
e
R
e
m
u
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
T
a
b
e

l

–
S

t
a
t
u
t
o
r
y
D
s
c
o
s
u
r
e

l

i

A
m
o
u
n
t
s

$

S
h
o
r
t
-
t
e
r
m

P
o
s
t
-

l

E
m
p
o
y
m
e
n
t

S
h
o
r
t
T
e
r
m

L
o
n
g
T
e
r
m

F
i
x
e
d
R
e
m
u
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

V
a
r
i
a
b
l
e
P
a
y

T
o
t
a

l

T
o
t
a
l

C
a
t
h
E
v
a
n
s
6

N
e

i
l

i

K
n
s
e

l
l

a
5

F
o
r
m
e
r

E
x
e
c
u
t
i
v
e
s

W
a
y
n
e
B
r
o
w
n
4

P
a
n
t
e

l
i

F
e

l
i

c
i
t
y

i

d
s
3

H
a
y
d
e
n

S
t
e
p
h
e
n
s

B
r
y
c
e

H
o
u
g
h
t
o
n
2

K
e
n
F
o
w

l
i

e
1

A
n
d
r
e
w
G
r
e
c
h

N
a
m
e

F
Y
1
5

F
Y
1
6

F
Y
1
5

F
Y
1
6

F
Y
1
5

F
Y
1
6

F
Y
1
5

F
Y
1
6

F
Y
1
5

F
Y
1
6

F
Y
1
5

F
Y
1
6

F
Y
1
5

F
Y
1
6

F
Y
1
5

F
Y
1
6

F
Y
1
5

F
Y
1
6

Y
e
a
r

2
,
8
8
4
,
7
9
6

3
,
0
4
5
,
1
4
5

3
8
2
,
6
8
1

3
1
8
,
9
2
6

4
7
1
,
6
2
5

2
3
6
,
2
3
9

3
5
1
,
1
8
7

1
4
1
,
8
4
9

3
2
7
,
0
5
4

3
8
4
,
0
5
3

3
8
1
,
2
6
0

3
8
3
,
4
7
1

3
8
5
,
6
1
9

4
2
8
,
0
5
2

6
5
1
,
7
6
3

5
4
2
,
9
3
7

5
4
3
,
2
2
5

-

S
a
l
a
r
y

9
2
,
0
4
9

4
0
,
6
5
3

-

-

3
,
2
3
3

1
,
7
7
2

5
0
,
5
9
1

4
,
3
0
0

1
0
,
1
6
3

-

1
7
,
2
4
0

1
7
,
2
4
0

6
,
0
5
9

6
,
2
0
0

6
5
9

-

1
0
,
1
6
3

5
,
0
8
2

1
4
1
,
5
0
4

1
5
0
,
4
7
3

1
8
,
7
8
3

1
9
,
7
5
6

1
8
,
7
8
3

8
,
7
1
2

-

-

1
8
,
7
8
3

1
9
,
3
0
8

1
8
,
7
8
3

3
0
,
7
7
9

1
9
,
6
7
4

2
7
,
6
8
8

1
3
,
0
3
5

3
8
,
6
8
4

3
9
,
2
0
9

-

b
e
n
e
f
i
t
s

m
o
n
e
t
a
r
y

N
o
n
-

b
e
n
e
f
i
t
s

a
n
n
u
a
t
i
o
n

S
u
p
e
r
-

l
e
a
v
e

s
e
r
v
i
c
e

L
o
n
g

5
4
,
9
5
4

3
,
1
7
3
,
3
0
3

6
0
,
7
4
1

3
,
2
9
7
,
0
1
2

6
,
5
0
1

6
,
3
1
8

-

-

9
,
2
8
0

-

1
0
,
0
0
1

1
3
,
5
0
7

1
1
,
4
8
6

1
8
,
3
0
6

2
,
6
5
8

2
,
3
6
1

-

-

1
5
,
3
2
5

1
9
,
9
5
2

4
0
7
,
9
6
5

3
4
5
,
0
0
0

4
7
4
,
8
5
8

2
3
8
,
0
1
1

4
2
9
,
8
4
1

1
5
4
,
8
6
1

3
6
6
,
0
0
1

4
1
6
,
8
6
8

4
2
8
,
7
6
9

4
4
9
,
7
9
6

4
1
4
,
0
1
0

4
5
8
,
7
6
0

6
7
0
,
9
9
8

6
0
7
,
1
0
9

6
0
7
,
4
6
8

T
o
t
a
l

-

3
5
3
,
2
9
8

3
0
8
,
3
5
0

1
2
5
,
0
0
0

2
5
,
0
0
0

2
8
,
2
9
8

2
5
,
0
0
0

-

-

8
0
,
0
0
0

9
3
,
7
5
0

3
0
,
0
0
0

-

-

1
8
9
,
6
0
0

3
0
,
0
0
0

3
5
,
0
0
0

-

-

4
9
,
0
8
4

7
3
,
5
4
8

4
,
8
1
4

9
2
1

4
,
8
1
4

(
4
,
8
1
4
)

(
5
,
5
4
9
)

9
,
5
1
4

1
2
,
1
7
2

4
,
1
6
2

5
,
5
4
9

1
2
,
7
2
3

1
2
,
9
3
8

1
5
,
3
6
0

1
4
,
4
5
1

2
9
,
7
9
7

5
,
7
8
0

-

B
o
n
u
s

O
p
t
i
o
n
s

i

R
g
h
t
s

/

a
n
c
e

P
e
r
f
o
r
m

-

4
0
2
,
3
8
2

3
8
1
,
8
9
8

1
2
9
,
8
1
4

2
5
,
9
2
1

3
3
,
1
1
2

(
4
,
8
1
4
)

3
4
,
5
1
4

(
5
,
5
4
9
)

1
0
5
,
9
2
2

8
4
,
1
6
2

3
5
,
5
4
9

1
2
,
7
2
3

2
0
2
,
5
3
8

3
5
,
7
8
0

1
5
,
3
6
0

4
9
,
4
5
1

2
9
,
7
9
7

-

T
o
t
a
l

4
9
9
,

3
3
1

-

3
7
5
,

0
0
2

-

1
2
4
,

3
2
9

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

S
e
r
v
i
c
e

E
n
d
o
f

3

,

5
7
5

,

6
8
5

4

,

1
7
8

,

2
4
1

5
3
7

,

7
7
9

7
4
5

,

9
2
3

5
0
7

,

9
7
0

2
3
3

,

1
9
7

4
6
4

,

3
5
5

2
7
3

,

6
4
1

4
5
0

,

1
6
3

5
2
2

,

7
9
0

4
6
4

,

3
1
8

4
6
2

,

5
1
9

6
1
6

,

5
4
8

4
9
4

,

5
4
0

6
8
6

,

3
5
8

6
5
6

,

5
6
0

6
3
7

,

2
6
5

o
n

-

R
e
m
u
n
e
r
a
t
i
-

T
o
t
a

l

6

5

4

3

2

1

t
o
A
U
D
u
s
n
g

i

a
n
a
v
e
r
a
g
e
e
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

r
a
t
e
.

B
H
o
u
g
h
t
o
n

c
o
m
m
e
n
c
e
d

3
0
N
o
v
e
m
b
e
r
2
0
1
5
.

W
B
r
o
w
n

c
e
a
s
e
d

a
s
K
M
P
o
n

3
0
N
o
v
e
m
b
e
r
2
0
1
5
.

N
K
n
s
e

i

l
l

a

c
e
a
s
e
d

l

e
m
p
o
y
m
e
n
t
o
n

5
F
e
b
r
u
a
r
y
2
0
1
6
.

C
E
v
a
n
s
w
a
s

o
n
a

l

e
a
v
e

o
f
a
b
s
e
n
c
e
w

i
t
h
o
u
t
p
a
y

f
r
o
m
2
9
M
a
r
c
h

2
0
1
6

a
n
d
c
e
a
s
e
d

l

e
m
p
o
y
m
e
n
t

o
n

3
0
J
u
n
e
2
0
1
6

.

F
P
a
n
t
e

l
i

d
s

i

i

r
e
c
e
v
e
d
a

r
e
m
u
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

j

a
d
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
o
n

i

a
p
p
o
n
t
m
e
n
t

t
o

t
h
e

r
o
e

l

o
f

G
r
o
u
p
C
h
e
f

i

O
p
e
r
a

t
i

n
g
O

f
f
i
c
e
r

f
r
o
m
1
J
u
y
2
0
1
5

l

.

K
F
o
w

l
i

e

r
e
c
e
v
e
d

i

a

r
e
m
u
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

j

a
d
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
b
a
s
e
d

o
n

h
s

i

i

a
p
p
o
n
t
m
e
n
t

t
o

t
h
e
r
o
e

l

o
f

C
h
e
f

i

E
x
e
c
u

t
i
v
e
O

f
f
i
c
e
r
,

U
K

f
r
o
m
1
M
a
y

2
0
1
5

.

T
h
e

i

n
c
r
e
a
s
e
w
a
s

e

f
f

e
c
t
i
v
e

f
r
o
m
1

l

J
u
y
2
0
1
5

.

H
e
w
a
s

p
a
d

i

i

n
P
o
u
n
d
S
t
e
r
l
i

n
g
,

l

S
a
e
r

t

a
n
d
G
o
r
d
o
n

i

L
m

i
t

e
d

P
a
g
e

3
5

w
h
c
h

i

h
a
s
b
e
e
n
c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
d

1
1

.

3
%

9

.

1
%

2
4

.

1
%

3

.

5
%

6

.

5
%

.

(
2
1
%

)

7

.

4
%

.

(
2
0
%

)

1
8

.

7
%

2
0

.

3
%

7

.

7
%

2

.

8
%

3
2

.

9
%

-

7

.

2
%

2

.

2
%

7

.

5
%

4

.

7
%

1
.
4
%

1
.
8
%

0
.
9
%

0
.
1
%

0
.
9
%

(
2
.
1
%

)

(
2
.
0
%

)

2
.
0
%

0
.
9
%

2
.
3
%

1
.
2
%

2
.
8
%

2
.
1
%

1
.
2
%

2
.
2
%

2
.
2
%

4
.
7
%

-

%

%

R
e

l

a
t
e
d

a
n
c
e

P
e
r
f
o
r
m

-

a
s
E
q
u
i
t
y

D
e
l
i
v
e
r
e
d

R
e
m
u
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

P
r
o
p
o
r
t
i
o
n
o
f
T
o
t
a
l

44  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

4.9.2  Executive Remuneration Table 

This table represents the value to the executives of cash paid and vested equity awards (intrinsic value) received during 
the year and unvested equity awards (AASB 2 value) granted during the financial year, at risk. The LTI equity granted is 
a value determined under AASB 2 discounted for vesting probabilities of performance criteria which may or may not vest 
depending  on  future  outcomes  that  are  uncertain.  Accordingly,  this  table  incorporates  data  that  represents  the 
accumulation of outcomes arising from multiple years.  

Fixed Remuneration and Cash Incentives Received 

Name 

Andrew Grech 

Ken Fowlie 

Bryce Houghton 

Hayden Stephens 

Felicity Pantelidis 

Former Executives 

Wayne Brown 

Neil Kinsella 

Cath Evans 

Total 

Total 

Year 

FY16 
FY15 
FY16 
FY15 
FY16 
FY15 
FY16 
FY15 
FY16 
FY15 

FY16 
FY15 
FY16 

FY15 
FY16 
FY15 

FY16 

FY15 

Fixed 
Remuneration 

Cash Incentives 
received in the 
current year 

587,515 
591,784 
670,998 
456,399 
411,352 
- 
431,490 
417,284 
403,361 
356,000 

154,861 
420,561 

238,011 

474,858 
338,682 
401,465 

3,236,270 

3,118,351 

35,000 
125,000  
30,000 
50,000  
100,000 
- 
30,000 
50,000  
80,000 
46,750 

25,000 
60,000 

28,298 

94,325  
125,000 
265,000  

453,298 

691,075 

(1)  See 4.4.2 regarding the cancellation of the FY16 LTI. 

Future at risk 
remuneration 
received during 
the year (LTI)(1) 
- 
61,608 
- 
24,643 
- 
- 
- 
23,657 
- 
17,743 

- 
23,657 
- 

23,807 
- 
23,807 

- 

198,922 

Total Cash 

622,515 
716,784 
700,998 
506,399 
511,352 
- 
461,490 
467,284 
483,361 
402,750 

179,861 
480,561 

266,309 

569,183 
463,682 
666,465 

3,689,568 

3,809,426 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 36 

Slater and Gordon Limited  45

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

5.  Employee Share Scheme and Other Share Information 

5.1.  Employee Share Schemes operated by the Group  

Plan Details 

Type of 
Instruments 

Employee 
Ownership 
Plan (“EOP”) 
Date established: 
2006 
Last offered: 
2009 

Vesting 
Convertible 
Redeemable 
Ordinary 
Shares 
(“VCR 
shares”) 

Details 

Purpose 

Issue of VCR shares with a loan (full 
recourse but interest free) equal to the 
subscription amount to eligible and invited 
executives. Vesting was dependent on 
meeting designated performance criteria 
(Balanced Scorecard), remaining employed 
and repaying the loan. 
No executive KMP are current participants in 
the EOP. 

The purpose of the EOP was to encourage key 
participating employees to take on a significant 
stake in SGH over the course of their careers.  
As at 30 June 2016, there was a total of 
1,963,667 ordinary shares subject to disposal 
restrictions (value – $705,171) under the 
EOP.  The loans outstanding in relation to 
these shares totalled $8,300,784 which are 
only repayable if the VCR shares vest.  

Equity Incentive 
Plan (“EIP”) 
Date 
established: Nov 
2014 

Performance 
rights under 
Executive 
Equity 
Incentive 
Scheme 
(“EEIS”) 

A performance incentive scheme designed   
to reward participants with achieving 
market competitive business outcomes. 
Participants receive an award based on a 
predetermined formula, as approved by the 
Board from time to time based on market 
standards and trends. 

Equity Incentive 
Plan (“EIP”)  
Date 
established:  
Nov 2014 

Service 
rights under 
Deferred 
Short Term 
Incentive 
Scheme 
(“DSTIS”) 

  A deferred short term incentive scheme 
designed to reward participants in equity by 
deferring for 2 years a portion of their STI 
earned (up to 30%). 
An initial offer was made to invited 
executives in FY16, however, no subsequent 
grants were made in respect of the STI 
deferred scheme. The plan is currently 
suspended. 
No executive KMP participate in the DSTIS. 

Equity 
Incentive Plan 
(“EIP”) 
Date established: 
Nov 2014 
Grant date:  
13 Nov 2015 

Exempt  
shares under 
Share Save 
Scheme 
(“SSS) 

  The exempt share save scheme allows 
participating Australian employees to 
acquire up to $1,000 of SGH shares each 
year tax free (subject to qualifying 
conditions) on a co-contribution basis (the 
November 2014 offer under the SSS was 
$500 company and $500 individual). 

Share Incentive 
Plan (“SIP”) 
Date established: 
Dec 2014 

Ordinary 
shares under 
SIP 

  The SIP allows participating United 
Kingdom employees to acquire SGH 
shares each year on a tax concessional 
basis (subject to qualifying conditions) and 
on a co-contribution basis (the December 
offer under the SIP was GBP 375 company 
and GBP 375 individual). 
No SIP was offered during FY16. 

The purpose of the EIP is to provide annual 
equity incentives to invited executives in line 
with current market standards and 
expectations. The offer terms for EIP awards 
are flexible, but meet contemporary LTI 
design standards. The first grant of 
performance rights under this plan was made 
on 18 November 2014. 
As at 30 June 2016, 45 employees held 
412,000 performance rights (Value - 
$147,953). Vesting is subject to continuing 
service and meeting performance hurdles. 
Also refer section 4.4.2. 

The purpose of the EIP is to provide annual 
equity to invited executives in line with 
current market standards and expectations.  
There are currently no Service Rights issued 
through the DSTIS. 

The purpose of the exempt SSS is to 
encourage broad based employee equity 
participation in Australia on an affordable and 
sustainable basis in line with current market 
standards and expectations.  
During FY16, 401 employees accepted 
142,756 exempt shares in the SSS (Value – 
$200,500). 

The purpose of the SIP is to encourage 
broad based employee equity participation in 
the UK on an affordable and sustainable 
basis in line with current market standards 
and expectations.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 37 

46  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

5.2.  Employee Share Scheme Grants to Executive KMP 

5.2.1.  Vesting and Exercise of Performance Rights granted as Remuneration 

During FY16, no performance rights vested or were exercised. 

5.2.2.  Analysis of Movement in Performance Rights 

During  the  financial  year,  the  movement  in  the  number  and  value  of  performance  rights  over  ordinary  shares  of  SGH 
acquired under EIP LTI held by executive KMP is detailed below: 

Number 
held at 1 
July 
2015 

40,000 

16,000 

Number 
offered in 
year (1) 
133,578 

83,486 

Offer 
Value ($) 

15,295  

9,559  

- 

113,000 

12,939  

16,000 

58,440 

6,691  

12,000 

66,789 

7,647  

Andrew Grech 

Ken Fowlie 
Bryce 
Houghton 
Hayden 
Stephens 
Felicity 
Pantelidis 

Former 
Executives 

Wayne Brown 
Neil Kinsella 

Cath Evans 

16,000 
16,000 

16,000 

- 
- 

-  
-  

50,092 

5,736  

Total 

132,000 

505,385 

57,867  

 (1)  Rights were offered and accepted but not granted, see 4.4.2. 

5.3.  KMP Equity Interests  

Number 
exercise
-ed in 
year 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 
- 

- 

- 

Number 
cancelled 
during 
year 

(133,578) 

(83,486) 

(113,000) 

(58,440) 

(66,789) 

Number 
forfeited 
during 
year 

Number 
held at 30 
June 
2016 

Intrinsic 
Value at 
30 June 
2016 ($) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

40,000 

      15,600  

16,000 

         6,240  

- 

-  

16,000 

         6,240  

12,000 

         4,680  

- 
- 

(16,000) 
(16,000) 

(50,092) 

(16,000) 

- 
- 

- 

-  
-  

-  

(505,385) 

(48,000) 

84,000 

32,760 

In accordance with the Corporations Act (section 205G(1)), the Company is required to notify the interests (shares and 
rights to shares) of directors to the ASX. 

In the interests of transparency and completeness of disclosure, this information is provided for each NED (as required 
under the Corporations Act) and all executive KMP. 

Please refer section 4.7.2 Hedging and margin lending prohibition for more information. 

The table below indicates shareholdings of SGH KMPs: 

Number held at 1 
July 2015 

Acquisitions 

Disposals 

Number held at 30 
June 2016 

John Skippen 
James M. Millar 
Ian Court 
Erica Lane 
Rhonda O’Donnell 
Andrew Grech 
Ken Fowlie 
Bryce Houghton 

Hayden Stephens 
Felicity Pantelidis 

Former Executives 

Wayne Brown 
Neil Kinsella 
Cath Evans 

25,000 
- 
59,804 
170,000 
25,000 
6,750,656 
5,646,221 
-  

4,804,115 
16,161 

345,103 
427,127 
4,081,433 

35,000 
20,000 
10,000 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
305 

- 
- 
- 

22,350,620 

65,305 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

60,000 
20,000 
69,804 
170,000 
25,000 
6,750,656 
5,646,221 
- 

4,804,115 
16,466 

345,103 
427,127 
4,081,433 

22,415,925 

Intrinsic 
Value at 30 
June 2016 
($) 

23,400 
7,800 
27,224 
66,300 
9,750 
2,632,752 
2,202,026 
- 

1,873,605 
6,422 

134,590 
166,580 
1,591,759 

8,742,208 

Page 38 

Slater and Gordon Limited  47

Annual Report 2016 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued) 

The  table  below  indicates  any  unvested  performance  rights  issued  to  executive  KMP  before  30  June  2016,  but  still 
subject to performance hurdles and service conditions:  

Andrew Grech 
Ken Fowlie 
Bryce Houghton 
Hayden Stephens 

Felicity Pantelidis 

Former Executives 

Wayne Brown 
Neil Kinsella 
Cath Evans 

Unvested 
EOP Shares 

Unvested 
Performance 
Rights 

Total Number 
held at  
30 June 2016 

Intrinsic Value 
at 30 June 2016 
($) 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

40,000 
16,000 
- 
16,000 

12,000 

- 
- 
- 

40,000 
16,000 
- 
16,000 

12,000 

- 
- 
- 

15,600 
6,240 
- 
6,240 

4,680 

- 
- 
- 

84,000 

84,000 

32,760 

6.  Service Contracts and Employment Agreements  

6.1.  Employment Agreements: Executive Directors and Other KMP Executives 

The following sets out details of the employment agreements relating to the executive KMP: 

Length of Contract 

Executive KMP are on rolling contracts, which are ongoing employment contracts until notice is given 
by either party. 

Notice Periods 

Resignation 

Termination on 
Notice by the 
Company 

Redundancy 

In  order  to  terminate  the  employment  arrangements,  executive  KMP  are  required  to  provide  the 
Company between three (3) and six (6) months’ written notice.  
In  the  case  of  the  GCFO,  he  is  required  to  provide  a  minimum  of  6  months’  notice  of  termination 
during the first 18 months of service. Subsequently, a minimum of 3 months’ notice must be given. 

On resignation, unless the Board determines otherwise, all unvested STI or LTI benefits are forfeited. 

The  Company  may  terminate  employment  by  providing  between  three  (3)  months’  and  six  (6) 
months’ written notice or payment in lieu of the notice period based on TFR. On termination, unless 
the  Board  determines  otherwise,  unvested  STI  or  LTI  benefits  may  be  exercised  or  paid  within  30 
days of notice being given.  
In the case  of the GCFO SGH is required to provide a minimum of 6 months’ notice of termination 
during his first 18 months of service. Subsequently a minimum of 3 months’ notice must be given. 

If  the  Company  terminates  employment  for  reasons  of  redundancy,  under  Company  policy  a 
severance  payment  may  include  4  weeks’  notice  plus  one  additional  week  if  the  employee  has 
completed  5  years’  service  and is over the  age of 45.  Any  additional  redundancy  payments  will be 
made in accordance with relevant legislation. 
All STI and LTI benefits are either: 
•  released in full or on a pro-rata basis; or 
•  remain subject to performance criteria and vesting date, 
at the discretion of the Board with regard to the circumstances. 

Death or Total and 
Permanent Disability 

On death or total and permanent disability, the Board has discretion to allow all unvested STI and LTI 
benefits to vest. 

Termination for 
Serious Misconduct 

The Company may immediately terminate employment at any time in the case of serious misconduct, 
and executive directors and other KMP Executives will only be entitled to payment of TFR up to the 
date of termination. 
On termination without notice by the Company in the event of serious misconduct: 
•  all unvested STI or LTI benefits will be forfeited; and 
•  any  ESS  instruments  provided  to  the  employee  on  vesting  of  STI  or  LTI  awards  that  are  held  in 

trust, will be forfeited. 

Statutory 
Entitlements 

Payment  of  statutory  entitlements  of  long  service  leave  and  annual  leave  applies  in  all  events  of 
separation. 

Vendor Shareholders  Any executive who was one of the seven Vendor Shareholders is a party to the Vendor Shareholder 
Agreement  released  to  the  ASX  on  21  May  2007,  and  is  subject  to  minimum  shareholding 
requirements and the consequences which flow from the cessation of their employment as a term of 
that agreement. 

Post-Employment 
Restraints 

The  employment  agreement  contains  a  restraint  of  trade  provision  which  applies  for  a  period  of 
between 6 months and 12 months. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 39 

End of Remuneration Report

48  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
  
 
 
Ernst & Young
8 Exhibition Street 
Melbourne  VIC  3000  Australia
GPO Box 67 Melbourne  VIC  3001

Tel: +61 3 9288 8000
Fax: +61 3 8650 7777
ey.com/au

Auditor’s Independence Declaration to the Directors of Slater and 
Gordon Limited  

As lead auditor for the review of Slater and Gordon Limited and Controlled Entities for the year 
ended 30 June 2016, I declare to the best of my knowledge and belief, there have been: 

a) no contraventions of the auditor independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 

in relation to the audit; and   

b) no contraventions of any applicable code of professional conduct in relation to the audit. 

This declaration is in respect of Slater and Gordon Limited and the entities it controlled during the 
financial year. 

Ernst & Young 

Christopher George 
Partner 
Melbourne 
29 August 2016 

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited

Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

Slater and Gordon Limited  49

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated  Statement  of  Profit  or  Loss  and  Other 
Comprehensive Income 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

Revenue  
Fee revenue  
Net movement in work in progress 
Services revenue 
Revenue from contracts with customers 
Gain from bargain purchase 
Other income 
Total revenue and other income  

Less expenses 
Salaries and employee benefit expense 
Payments to former owners 
Share based payment expense to former owners 
Cost of sales 
Rental expense 
Advertising and marketing expense 
Administration and office expense 
Consultant fees 
Finance costs 
Bad and doubtful debts 
Depreciation and amortisation expense 
Costs associated with acquisitions 
Other expenses 
Impairment of intangible assets 
(Loss)/Profit before income tax expense 
Income tax (benefit)/expense 
(Loss)/Profit for the year after income tax   

Other comprehensive income, net of tax 
Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss: 

Foreign currency translation differences - foreign operations  

Changes in fair value of cash flow hedges 

Total items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss 

Other comprehensive (loss)/income for the year, net of tax 

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year, net of tax 

(Loss)/Profit for the year attributed to: 

Owners of the Company 

Non-controlling interests 

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year attributed to: 

Owners of the Company 
Non-controlling interests 

Note 

3.1 

2 

3.2 

3.2 

3.2 

3.2 

4.1 

3.4 

2016 
$’000 

698,486 
(41,318) 
234,302 
891,470 
- 
16,715 
908,185 

416,294 
18,529 
14,699 
170,297 
38,169 
136,596 
92,528 
36,158 
42,548 
39,342 
17,743 
738 
34,506 
879,506 
(1,029,468) 
(11,873) 
(1,017,595) 

(35,013) 

(1,130) 

(36,143) 

(36,143) 

2015 
$’000 
Restated* 

486,267 
10,706 
20,472 
517,445 
72,508 
8,232 
598,185 

263,348 
13,933 
11,506 
16,662 
27,807 
56,289 
44,195 
6,595 
11,210 
11,585 
9,945 
23,769 
15,933 
- 
85,408 
23,034 
62,374 

60,867 

(409) 
60,458 

60,458 

(1,053,738) 

122,832 

(1,017,306) 

(289) 
(1,017,595) 

(1,053,426) 
(312) 

(1,053,738) 

62,288 

86 
62,374 

122,654 

178 

122,832 

Basic earnings per share (cents) 

Diluted earnings per share (cents) 

3.6 

3.6 

(289.1) cents 

(289.1) cents 

26.5 cents 

26.3 cents 

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

*Certain amounts shown here do not correspond to the 30 June 2015 full year financial statements and reflect adjustments made for 
AASB 15 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers, refer to Note 1.3.

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 41 

50  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 
As at 30 June 2016 

Current assets 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Receivables 

Work in progress 

Current tax assets 

Other current assets 

Total current assets 

Non-current assets 

Property, plant and equipment 

Receivables 

Work in progress 

Intangible assets 

Deferred tax assets 

Other non-current assets 

Total non-current assets 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Payables 

Short term borrowings 

Current tax liabilities 

Other current liabilities 

Provisions 

Total current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Payables 

Long term borrowings 

Deferred tax liabilities 

Derivative financial instruments 

Provisions 

Total non-current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

Equity 
Contributed equity 

Reserves 

Retained profits 

Total equity attributable to equity holders in the Company 

Non-controlling interest 

Total equity 

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 
Restated* 

1 July 2014 
$’000 
Restated* 

Note 

5.1 
4.2 

4.3 

3.4 

4.4 

4.2 

4.3 

4.1 

3.4 

4.5 

5.2 

3.4 

4.6 

4.5 

5.2 

3.4 

4.6 

5.5 

82,494 

528,915 

361,898 

16,803 

24,217 

96,985 

574,295 

454,767 

34,636 

26,454 

25,270 

183,684 

192,259 

- 

12,403 

1,014,327 

1,187,137 

413,616 

33,207 

8,853 

31,959 

31,744 

225,635 

221,927 

393,970 

1,343,224 

46,725 

11,314 

88,230 

8,545 

719,704 

1,725,629 

1,734,031 

2,912,766 

12,964 

45,684 

189,260 

123,655 

22,264 

11,844 

405,671 

819,287 

463,570 

612,670 

190,527 

3,642 

9,301 

7,490 

52,455 

3,753 

23,412 

10,985 

38,317 

9,076 

3,899 

10,103 

20,124 

536,458 

689,137 

233,729 

510 

761,138 

112,950 

2,841 

15,037 

3,121 

707,354 

144,088 

1,621 

17,274 

892,476 

873,458 

1,428,934 
305,097 

1,562,595 

1,350,171 

1,116,048 
54,290 

1,098,345 

80,119 

(865,348) 

171,288 

304,990 

1,349,752 

107 

419 

7,383 

117,255 

97,108 

1,020 

4,760 

227,526 

461,255 

358,032 

217,049 

14,122 

126,620 

357,791 

241 

305,097 

1,350,171 

358,032 

* Certain amounts shown here do not correspond to the 30 June 2015 full year financial statements and reflect adjustments made for 
AASB  15  –  Revenue  from  Contracts  with  Customers,  refer  to  Note  1.3  and  fair  value  adjustments  on  finalisation  of  acquisition 
accounting. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 42 

Slater and Gordon Limited  51

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

2016 

Note  Contributed 
Equity 

Retained 
Profits 

Cash Flow 
Hedging 
Reserve 

Foreign 
Currency 
Translation 
Reserve 

Share-based 
Payment 
Reserve 

Total 

Non-
controlling 
interest 

Total 
Equity 

Balance as at 1 July 2015 (restated*) 

Net loss after tax for the year 

Total other comprehensive loss for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year  

Transactions with owners in their capacity 
as owners 

Ordinary and VCR shares issued (net) 

Dividends paid 

Transfer from share based payments reserve 

Recognition of share based payments expense 

to former owners  

Costs of equity raising 

Issue of warrants 

Performance rights 

Total transactions with owners in their 
capacity as owners 

Balance as at 30 June 2016  

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

1,098,345 

171,288 

(1,189) 

70,689 

10,619 

1,349,752 

419 

1,350,171 

- 

- 

(1,017,306) 

- 

- 

- 

(1,130) 

(34,990) 

- 

- 

(1,017,306) 

(289) 

(1,017,595) 

(36,120) 

(23) 

(36,143) 

- 

(1,017,306) 

(1,130) 

(34,990) 

- 

(1,053,426) 

(312) 

(1,053,738) 

5.5 

3.5 

5.5 

5.5 

5.5 

3,128 

- 

- 

(19,330) 

11,808 

- 

2,767 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

17,703 

(19,330) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

3,128 

(19,330) 

(11,808) 

- 

14,699 

14,699 

- 

7,422 

(22) 

2,767 

7,422 

(22) 

10,291 

8,664 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

3,128 

(19,330) 

- 

14,699 

2,767 

7,422 

(22) 

8,664 

1,116,048 

(865,348) 

(2,319) 

35,699 

20,910 

304,990 

107 

305,097 

2015 
Restated* 

Note  Contributed 
Equity 

Retained 
Profits 

Cash Flow 
Hedging 
Reserve 

Foreign 
Currency 
Translation 
Reserve 

Share-based 
Payment 
Reserve 

Total 

Non-
controlling 
interest 

Total 
Equity 

Balance as at 1 July 2014 (restated) 

217,049 

126,620 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

(780) 

$’000 

9,914 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

4,988 

357,791 

241 

358,032 

Net profit after tax for the year (previously 

reported) 

Total other comprehensive income for the year 

(previously reported) 

Adjustments  

Total comprehensive income for the year 

(restated) 

Transactions with owners in their capacity 

as owners 

Ordinary and VCR shares issued (net) 

Dividends paid  

Transfer from share based payments reserve 

Recognition of share based payments expense 

to former owners  
Costs of equity raising 

Performance rights  

1.3 

5.5 

3.5 

5.5 

5.5 

5.5 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

83,554 

- 

- 

- 

(409) 

63,438 

(21,266) 

-   

(2,663) 

62,288 

(409) 

60,775 

83,554 

249 

83,803 

63,029 

104 

63,133 

(23,929) 

(175) 

(24,104) 

122,654 

178 

122,832 

896,352 

- 

- 

(17,620) 

6,199 

- 

(21,255) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

896,352 

(17,620) 

(6,199) 

- 

11,506 

11,506 

- 

(21,255) 

324 

324 

5,631 

869,307 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

896,352 

(17,620) 

- 

11,506 

(21,255) 

324 

869,307 

Total transactions with owners in their 

881,296 

(17,620) 

capacity as owners 

Balance as at 30 June 2015 (restated) 

1,098,345 

171,288 

(1,189) 

70,689 

10,619 

1,349,752 

419 

1,350,171 

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

* Certain amounts shown here do not correspond to the 30 June 2015 full year financial statements and reflect adjustments made for AASB 15 
–  Revenue  from  Contracts  with  Customers,  refer  to  Note  1.3  and  fair  value  adjustments  on  finalisation  of  acquisition  accounting.

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 43 

52  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

Cash flow from operating activities 

Receipts from customers 

Payments to suppliers and employees 

Payments to former owners 

Interest received 

Borrowing costs 

Income tax refund/(paid) 

Net cash (used in)/provided by operating activities 

3.3 

Cash flow from investing activities 
Payment for software development 

Payment for plant and equipment 

Costs associated with acquisition of businesses 

Costs associated with originating loans 

Proceeds from disposal of businesses 

Repayment of cash consideration for SGS acquisition 

Payment for acquisition of businesses, net of cash in subsidiaries 

Payment for acquisition of businesses – deferred consideration 

Net cash used in investing activities 

Cash flow from financing activities 

Proceeds from share issue 

Costs of equity issued 

(Loans/payments to)/proceeds from related parties and employees  

Proceeds from borrowings 

Repayment of borrowings 

Dividends paid 

Net cash provided by financing activities 

Net (decrease)/increase in cash held 

Net foreign exchange difference 

Cash at beginning of financial year 

Cash at end of financial year 

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

5.5 

Note 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 

1,056,757 

520,954 

(1,135,083) 

(464,980) 

(14,211) 

381 

(35,263) 

23,175 
(104,244) 

(5,314) 

(12,743) 

(738) 
- 

168 
2,386 

(2,592) 

2,294 

(8,865) 

(6,049) 

40,762 

(9,166) 

(13,142) 

(23,662) 

(9,464) 

- 

- 

- 

(1,333,973) 

(12,002) 
(28,243) 

(14,720) 
(1,404,127) 

- 

(85) 

(5,353) 

192,787 

(44,759) 

(17,060) 

125,530 

(6,957) 

(7,534) 

96,985 
82,494 

890,939 

(18,438) 

3,356 

594,068 

(43,966) 

(15,924) 
1,410,035 

46,670 

25,045 
25,270 

96,985 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 44 

Slater and Gordon Limited  53

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the year ended 30 June 2016 

Note 1:  Basis of Preparation 

This  note  sets  out  the  accounting  policies  adopted  by  Slater  and  Gordon  Limited  (the  “company”  or  “parent”)  and  its 
consolidated entities (the “consolidated entity” or the “Group”) in the preparation and presentation of the financial report. 
Where an accounting policy is specific to one note, the policy is described within the note to which it relates. 

The financial report was authorised for issue by the directors as at the date of the Directors’ Report. 

Slater  and  Gordon  Limited  is  a  company  limited  by  shares,  incorporated  and  domiciled  in  Australia  whose  shares  are 
publicly traded on the Australian Securities Exchange. 

1.1 

Basis of Accounting 

This financial report is a general purpose financial report, for a ‘for-profit’ entity, which has been prepared in accordance 
with  Australian  Accounting  Standards,  Interpretations  and  other  applicable  authoritative  pronouncements  of  the 
Australian Accounting Standards Board and the Corporations Act 2001. The consolidated financial statements of Slater 
and Gordon Limited also comply with the International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) issued by the International 
Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”). 

The financial report has been prepared under the historical cost convention, except where noted.  

This year the Group’s financial statements have been presented in a more streamlined manner by changing the format 
and the layout to simplify the information disclosed and make it more relevant to users.  Similar notes have been grouped 
into sections with relevant accounting policies and judgement and estimate disclosures incorporated within the notes to 
which they relate.   

Comparatives have been updated for changes in accounting policies as described in Note 1.3 below. 

The  parent  entity  and  the  consolidated  entity  have  applied  the  relief  available  under  ASIC  Corporations  (Rounding  in 
Financial/Directors’ Reports) Instrument 2016/191 and accordingly, amounts in the consolidated financial statements and 
Directors’ Report have been rounded off to the nearest thousand dollars, or in certain cases, to the nearest dollar.  

Going Concern 

The financial report has been prepared on a going concern basis. 

The  Directors,  having  given  consideration  to  the  current  financial  forecasts  for  the  Group,  the  engagement  with  the 
banking syndicate and its financial advisers, the comprehensive review, and the performance improvement programmes 
being implemented by management, consider the going concern basis of preparation is appropriate. Refer to Note 5.2 for 
additional details. 

1.2 

Basis of Consolidation 

The consolidated financial statements comprise the financial statements of the parent entity and of all entities which the 
parent  entity  controls.  The  Group  controls  an  entity  when  it  is  exposed,  or  has  rights,  to  variable  returns  from  its 
involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. 

The financial statements of subsidiaries are prepared for the same reporting period as the parent entity, using consistent 
accounting policies. Adjustments are made to bring into line any dissimilar accounting policies which may exist.  

All  inter-company  balances  and  transactions,  including  any  unrealised  profits  or  losses,  have  been  eliminated  on 
consolidation.  Subsidiaries are consolidated from the  date  on which control is established  and are de-recognised from 
the date that control ceases. 

Non-controlling  interests  in  the  results  of  subsidiaries  are  shown  separately  in  the  consolidated  statement  of 
comprehensive income and consolidated statement of financial position.  

Any  changes  in  the  Group’s  ownership  interests  in  subsidiaries  that  do  not  result  in  the  Group  losing  control  over  the 
subsidiaries are accounted for as equity transactions. 

1.3 

Adoption of New Accounting Standards 

The Group adopted all the new mandatory standards and interpretations for the current reporting period. The adoption of 
these standards and interpretations did not result in a material change on the reported results and position of the Group 
as they did not result in any changes to the Group’s existing accounting policies. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 45 

54  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

1.3 

Adoption of New Accounting Standards (continued) 

The Group has elected to early adopt AASB 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers as issued in December 2014, 
which would otherwise be mandatorily effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018. The 
initial application date for the Group is 1 July 2015.  The Group elected to apply the standard on a full retrospective basis 
as permitted by AASB 15 whereby the cumulative effect of retrospective application is recognised by adjusting opening 
retained profits or other relevant components of equity for the earliest comparative period presented (which for the Group 
is  the comparative  period  beginning  on  1  July  2014). See  below for further  details on the key  impacts  arising  from the 
adoption  of the new standard. Refer to Note 3.1 for additional details, however key judgements adopted as part of the 
adoption of the new standard include: 

(i). 

Estimating variable consideration 

Prior  to  the  adoption  of  AASB  15,  in  previous  reporting  periods,  variable  consideration  expected  to  be  received  from 
services (including services provided on a No Win – No Fee basis) was estimated based on historical average fees and 
success outcomes.  

Under AASB 15, where consideration in respect of a contract is variable, revenue can only be recognised to the extent 
that it is highly probable that the cumulative amount of revenue recognised in respect of a contract will not be subject to a 
significant  reversal  when  the  uncertainty  associated  with  the  variable  consideration  is  subsequently  resolved  (this  is 
referred  to  as  the  “constraint”  requirements).  As  a  result,  the  Group  has  applied  the  new  constraint  requirements  in 
estimating  the  amount  of  variable  consideration  included  in  the  transaction  price  compared  to  the  amount  of  variable 
consideration previously included.  

(ii). 

Stage of completion 

As  a  result  of  more  detailed  requirements  under  AASB  15  with  respect  to  measuring  the  stage  of  completion  of  a 
performance  obligation,  the  Group  has  conducted  a  review  of  its  methodology  for  measuring  progress  towards 
completion of relevant performance obligations.   

In summary, as a result of early adopting AASB 15 on a full retrospective basis, the following adjustments were made to 
the  amounts recognised in the statement  of financial  position  and statement of  profit or loss and  other comprehensive 
income at 1 July 2014 and at the end of the comparative period (30 June 2015):  

Statement of Financial Position 

Work in progress (current and non-
current) 
Current tax liabilities 

Deferred tax liabilities 

Reserves 
Retained profits 

Non-controlling interests 

Statement of Profit or Loss and 
Other Comprehensive Income 

Net movement in work in progress 

Income tax expense 

Earnings per share 

Statement of Financial Position 

Receivables 

Work in progress* (current and non-
current) 
Current tax liabilities* 

Deferred tax liabilities* 
Reserves* 
Retained profits 

Non-controlling interests 

AASB 118 
carrying 
amount 
1 Jul 2014 

$’000 

467,334 

2,481 

123,621 
14,217 

187,213 

271 
30 Jun 2015  

$’000 

53,399 

30,728 

35.6 cents 

30 Jun 2015 

$’000 

619,855 

825,898 

22,556 
180,508 
82,877 

253,147 

624 

Prior Period 
Remeasurement 

Current Period 
Remeasurement 

AASB 15 
carrying 
amount 
1 Jul 2014 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

- 

- 

- 
- 

- 

- 

(85,815) 

1,418 

(26,513) 
(95) 

(60,593) 

(30) 

381,519 

3,899 

97,108 
14,122 

126,620 

241 
30 Jun 2015 

$’000 

$’000 

$’000 

- 

- 

- 

(42,693) 

(7,694) 

10,706 

23,034 

(14.9 cents) 

20.7 cents 

$’000 

- 

(86,706) 

1,612 
(26,886) 
(808) 

(60,592) 

(32) 

$’000 

(113) 

(45,576) 

(1,001) 
(9,021) 
(2,415) 

(33,079) 

(173) 

30 Jun 2015 

$’000 

619,742 

693,616 

23,167 
144,601 
79,654 

159,476 

419 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 46 

Slater and Gordon Limited  55

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

1.3 

Adoption of New Accounting Standards (continued) 

Remeasured  amounts  relate  solely  to  the  application  of  AASB  15  and  do  not  reflect  other  adjustments  as  a  result  of 
finalisation of provisional accounting for acquisitions. 

*  Prior  period  remeasurements  converted  at  the  closing  rate  in  the  current  period  with  the  resulting  foreign  exchange 
difference included in the Foreign Currency Translation Reserve included in Equity. 

1.4 

Significant Accounting Judgements, Estimates and Assumptions 

In  preparing  these  consolidated  financial  statements,  management  has  made  judgements,  estimates  and  assumptions 
that affect the application of the Group’s accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and 
expenses.  Actual  results  may  differ  from  these  estimates.  Estimates  and  underlying  assumptions  are  reviewed  on  an 
ongoing basis. Revisions to estimates are recognised prospectively.  

The  significant  judgements  made  by  management  in  applying  the  Group’s  accounting  policies  and  the  key  sources  of 
estimation uncertainty are outlined in detail within the specific note to which they relate. Noted below are new significant 
accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty applied in the current reporting year: 

(i). 

Revenue Recognition – Identifying the Performance Obligation 

In  personal  injury  matters,  contracts  with  clients  generally  comprise  a  single  distinct  performance  obligation,  being  the 
provision of services in pursuit of the successful settlement of a customer’s claim, and the transaction price is allocated 
to this single performance obligation.  Some contracts contain multiple deliverables – such as legal services in respect of 
a  statutory  claim  and  a  common  law  claim,  or  initial  pre-issue  work  and  litigation  work.  In  such  circumstances,  these 
multiple  deliverables  are  considered  to  represent  a  single  distinct  performance  obligation,  given  there  is  a  significant 
service  of  integration  performed  by  the  Group  in  delivering  these  services.  Management  considers  the  methods  used 
provide a faithful depiction of the transfer of goods or services. 

The  Group  has  some  contractual  arrangements  outside  of  personal  injury  matters  that  include  multiple  performance 
obligations.  In  these  transactions,  the  transaction  price  must  be  allocated  to  the  performance  obligations  on  a  relative 
stand-alone  selling  price  basis.  In  most  cases,  the  price  for  each  separate  performance  obligation  is  identified  in  the 
contract  and  in  most  cases,  these  prices  are  considered  to  be  reflective  of  the  stand-alone  selling  price  of  each 
performance obligation.  

The Group notes that it is not practicable to determine and track on a case-by-case basis the elements of a transaction 
that  should  be  attributed  to  pre-  and  post-acquisition  performance,  given  the  nature  of  the  estimates  of  variable 
consideration,  and  the  methodology  adopted  (based  around  actual  historical  average  fees  and  estimates  of  success 
rates on a cohort-by-cohort rather than case-by-case basis).  

(ii).  Revenue  Recognition  –  Estimating  the  Transaction  Price:  Variable  Consideration  –  No  Win  –  No  Fee 

Arrangements  

The  Group  provides  various  services  on  the  basis  of  No Win  –  No  Fee  conditional  fee  arrangements.  The  uncertainty 
around  the  fees  ultimately  receivable  under  these  types  of  contracts  is  generally  only  fully  resolved  when  a  matter  is 
concluded.  

Where  the  Group  has  sufficient  historical  experience  in  similar  contracts  in  order  to  be  able  to  estimate  the  expected 
outcome of a group of existing contracts reliably, revenue is estimated using the expected value method. Fees are only 
included in revenue to the extent that it is highly probable that the cumulative amount of revenue recognised in respect of 
a contract at the end of a reporting period will not be subject to significant reversal when a matter is concluded.  

To determine the probability of success of a case using the expected value method, a level of judgement is required to 
be  applied  based  on  past  experience  and  historical  performance  of  similar  matters.  The  estimated  amount  of  variable 
consideration is based on the expected fee for the nature of the legal service provided with reference to internal historical 
fee levels and relative rates of successful and unsuccessful outcomes. 

Where historical averages are not predictive of the probability of outcomes for a given contract, or where the Group has 
limited  historical  experience  with  similar  contracts,  the  expected  amount  of  variable  consideration  is  estimated  using  a 
most likely amount approach on a contract by contract basis. In such circumstances, a level of judgement is required to 
determine the likelihood of success of a given matter, as well as the estimated amount of fees that will be recovered in 
respect of the matter.  

In addition, when new businesses are acquired, there is a transition period during which time the Group’s practices and 
procedures are embedded into the operations of the new business. Therefore the valuation of work in progress acquired 
in a business combination may be adjusted during the period of provisional accounting for the acquisition. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 47 

56  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

1.4 

Significant Accounting Judgements, Estimates and Assumptions (continued) 

(iii).  Recognising Revenue: Measuring the Stage of Completion 

Revenue  is  recognised  when  control  of  a  service  is  transferred  to  the  customer.    The  Group  recognises  revenue  in 
respect  of  personal  injury  matters “over  time”  (as  opposed  to  at  a  “point  in  time”).    A  stage  of  completion  approach  is 
used  to  measure  progress  towards  completion  of  the  performance  obligation.    The  stage  of  completion  is  determined 
using  a  milestones  based  approach  using  prescribed  status  codes  for  client  matters  as  the  relevant  milestones.    The 
percentage  completion  is  determined  either  by  calculating  the  average  fee  received  for  matters  that  resolve  at  a 
particular status code  as a percentage of the average fee received for matters that resolve  at that status and any later 
status, or by use of defined completion allocations based on historical performance.   

In addition, when new businesses are acquired, there is a transition period during which time the Group’s practices and 
procedures are embedded into the operations of the new business. Therefore the valuation of work in progress acquired 
in a business combination may be adjusted during the period of provisional accounting for the acquisition. 

(iv).  Proposals from the Autumn 2015 Chancellor’s Statement 

The proposed reforms announced by the UK Government in November 2015 are expected to affect personal injury cases 
below  £5,000.  As  yet  there  has  been  no  announcement  in  relation  to  the  commencement  of  the  foreshadowed 
consultation  process  and  the  Company  has  made  its  best  effort  to  factor  potential  changes  into  its  assessment  of  the 
future cash flows, even though the results are not yet certain. 

As both the Slater and Gordon UK (“SGL UK”) and Slater Gordon Solutions (“SGS”) segments of the Group operate in 
the  UK,  management  has  also  given  consideration  to  the  possible  influence  of  the  outcome  of  the  UK  referendum  to 
withdraw from the European Union (“Brexit”) on the progress of the consultation process. 

It  is  not  clear  what  the  impact  of  Brexit  and  the  process  which  will  now  ensue  to  implement  the  UK’s  exit  from  the 
European Union will be on the UK economy however management assesses that the outcome of the Brexit referendum 
itself is not likely to have any material adverse impact on the performance of the Group.  

1.5 

Foreign Currency Translations and Balances  

Functional and Presentation Currency 

The  consolidated  financial  statements  are  presented  in  Australian  dollars  which  is  also  the  functional  currency  of  the 
parent  entity  and  all  Australian  subsidiaries.  The  financial  statements  of  each  entity  within  the  consolidated  entity  are 
measured  using  the  currency  of  the  primary  economic  environment  in  which  that  entity  operates  (the  functional 
currency). 

Transactions and Balances 

Transactions in foreign  currencies of  entities within  the consolidated  group  are translated into the respective functional 
currency of each entity at the rate of exchange ruling at the date of the transaction. The assets, liabilities and results of 
foreign  operations  where  their  functional  currency  is  different  to  the  presentation  currency  are  translated  as  disclosed 
below. 

Foreign currency monetary items that are outstanding at the reporting date are translated using the spot rate at the end 
of the financial year. 

Except  for  certain  foreign  currency  hedges,  all  resulting  exchange  differences  arising  on  settlement  or  re-statement  of 
monetary items are recognised as income and expenses for the financial year.  

Non-monetary items that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are translated using the exchange 
rates at the dates of the initial transactions and are not remeasured unless they are carried at fair value. 

Foreign Operations 

On  consolidation,  the  assets  and  liabilities  of  foreign  operations  are  translated  into  the  presentation  currency  of  the 
Group at the closing rate on the reporting date. Income and expenses are translated at average exchange rates for the 
period, unless the exchange rate fluctuated significantly during the period, in which case the exchange rates at the dates 
of the transactions are used.  All resulting exchange differences  are recognised in Other Comprehensive Income in the 
foreign currency translation reserve, a separate component of equity. 

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign operation are treated as assets and liabilities of 
the foreign operation and translated at the closing rate.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 48 

Slater and Gordon Limited  57

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

Note 2:  Segment Reporting 

An operating segment is a component of the Group that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues 
and  incur  expenses,  including  revenues  and  expenses  that  relate  to  transactions  with  any  of  the  Group’s  other 
components.  All  operating  segment  results  are regularly reviewed  by  the  Group’s  Managing  Director,  who  is  the  Chief 
Operating  Decision  Maker,  to  make  decisions  about  resources  to  be  allocated  to  the  segment  and  to  assess  its 
performance. 

The  Group  has  three  operating  segments  which  also  represents  its  three  reportable  segments,  as  described  below, 
which  are  the  Group’s  strategic  business  units.  Each  strategic  business  unit  is  managed  separately.  The  following 
summary describes each of the Group’s reportable segments: 

•  Slater and Gordon Australia (“AUS”) – includes the parent company Slater and Gordon Limited and its subsidiaries 
in Australia. This segment conducts a range of legal services within the geographical area of Australia. This segment 
also  includes  investments  in  the  Group’s  other  segments,  and  borrowings  and  capital  raising  activities  to  finance 
investment and operations of the combined Group.  

•  Slater and  Gordon  UK  (“SGL UK”) –  conducting  a range of  personal  injury  and  general law  legal  services in the 

United Kingdom.  

•  Slater Gordon Solutions (“SGS”)  – represents  the  acquired  business assets/entities from Quindell Plc in the UK, 
offering  legal  services  relating  to  road  traffic  accidents,  employee  liability  and  noise  induced  hearing  loss.  This 
segment also provides complementary services in health and motor services.  

Segment assets and liabilities are allocated to countries based on where the assets are located. 

AUS 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 

SGL UK 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 

2016 
$’000 

SGS 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 

TOTAL 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 

Revenue 
Fee and services revenue 
Movement in WIP 

Revenue from contracts with 
customers 

Gain from bargain purchase 
Other income 

Total revenue and other 
income 

Result 
EBITDA* 

265,629  245,706  229,958  225,991  437,201 
3,921 
(17,391) 
(27,848) 

(3,218) 

14,067 

35,042 
(143) 

932,788 
(41,318) 

506,739 
10,706 

237,781  259,773  212,567  222,773  441,122 

34,899 

891,470 

517,445 

- 
16,715 

72,508 
8,232 

908,185 

598,185 

(35,506) 

84,058 

(49,053) 

25,014 

(6,102) 

(5,780) 

(90,661) 

103,292 

Depreciation and amortisation  
Impairment of intangible assets  

(9,578) 
(55,803) 

(5,715) 
- 

(5,952) 
(9,458) 

(4,023) 

(2,213) 
-  (814,245) 

(207) 
- 

(17,743) 
(879,506) 

(9,945) 
- 

(Loss)/Profit before tax and net 
finance expense 

Net finance expense 

(Loss)/Profit before income tax 

Income tax (benefit)/expense 

Net (loss)/profit after income 
tax 

(100,887) 

78,343 

(64,463) 

20,991  (822,560) 

(5,987) 

(987,910) 

93,347 

(41,558) 

(7,939) 

  (1,029,468) 

85,408 

(11,873) 

23,034 

  (1,017,595) 

62,374 

EBITDAW** 

7,657 

69,992 

(31,663) 

28,231 

(10,023) 

(5,637) 

(49,343) 

92,586 

Total segment assets 
Total segment liabilities 

429,675  535,503  512,157  638,894  792,199  1,738,369  1,734,031  2,912,766 
388,315  1,428,934  1,562,595 
316,555  307,037  794,308  867,243  318,071 

Net assets per statement of 
financial position 

113,120  228,466  (282,151)  (228,349)  474,128  1,350,054 

305,097  1,350,171 

*EBITDA = Earnings before net interest, taxes, depreciation, amortisation and impairment. 

**EBITDAW = Earnings before net interest, taxes, depreciation, amortisation, impairment and movement in WIP. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 49 

58  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

Note 3:  Financial Performance 

3.1 

Revenue from Contracts with Customers 

3.1.1  Accounting Policies 

Provision of Legal Services – Personal Injury Law Claims 

The personal injury law practice operates on the basis of No Win – No Fee conditional fee arrangements, whereby fees 
are  earned  only  in  the  event  of  a  successful  outcome  of  a  customer’s  claim.  In  some  cases,  fees  may  be  fixed, 
depending on the stage at which a matter concludes. For some arrangements (primarily in the UK), fees are fixed as a 
specified percentage of damages awarded under a claim. 

In personal injury matters, contracts with clients generally comprise a single distinct performance obligation, being the 
provision of services in pursuit of the successful settlement of a customer’s claim, and the transaction price is allocated 
to this single performance obligation.  Some contracts contain multiple deliverables – such as legal services in respect 
of a statutory claim and a common law claim, or initial pre-issue work and litigation work. In such circumstances, these 
multiple  deliverables  are  considered  to  represent  a  single  distinct  performance  obligation,  given  there  is  a  significant 
service of integration performed  by the Group in delivering these services. Management considers the methods used 
provide a faithful depiction of the transfer of goods or services. 

The  uncertainty  around the fees  receivable  under a contract is generally  only  resolved when  a matter is concluded.  In 
recognising  revenue  in  the  personal  injury  practice,  where  the  Group  has  sufficient  historical  experience  in  similar 
contracts in order to be able to estimate the expected outcome of a group of existing contracts reliably, revenue from the 
fees from contracts is estimated using the expected value method based. The estimate amount of variable consideration 
is based on the expected fee for the nature of the legal service with reference to historical fee levels and relative rates of 
successful  and  unsuccessful  outcomes.  To  determine  the  probability  of  success  of  a  case,  a  level  of  judgement  is 
required to be applied based on past experience and historical performance of similar matters. 

Expected fees are only included in revenue to the extent that it is highly probable that the cumulative amount of revenue 
recognised  in  respect  of  a  contract  at  the  end  of  a  reporting  period  will  not  be  subject  to  significant  reversal  when  a 
matter is concluded.  

Where historical averages are not predictive of the probability of outcomes for a given contract, or where the Group has 
limited  historical  experience  with  similar  contracts,  the  expected  amount  of  variable  consideration  is  estimated  using  a 
most likely amount approach on a contract by contract basis. In such circumstances, a level of judgement is required to 
determine the likelihood of success of a given matter, as well as the estimated amount of fees that will be recovered in 
respect of the matter.  

Revenue  is  recognised  when  control  of  a  service  is  transferred  to  the  customer.    The  Group  recognises  revenue  in 
respect  of  personal  injury  matters “over  time”  (as  opposed  to  at  a  “point  in  time”).    A  stage  of  completion  approach  is 
used  to  measure  progress  towards  completion  of  the  performance  obligation.    The  stage  of  completion  is  determined 
using  a  milestones  based  approach  using  prescribed  status  codes  for  client  matters  as  the  relevant  milestones.    The 
percentage  completion  is  determined  either  by  calculating  the  average  fee  received  for  matters  that  resolve  at  a 
particular status code  as a percentage of the average fee received for matters that resolve  at that status and any later 
status, or by use of defined completion allocations based on historical performance 

Estimates  of  revenues  (including  interim  billing),  costs  or  extent  of  progress  toward  completion  are  revised  if 
circumstances change. Any resulting increases or decreases in estimated revenues or costs are reflected in profit or loss 
in the period in which the circumstances that give rise to the revision become known by management. 

The  Group  has  determined  that  no  significant  financing  component  exists  in  respect  of  the  personal  injury  revenue 
streams. This is because in personal injury matters, a substantial amount of the consideration promised by the customer 
is variable subject to the occurrence or non-occurrence of a future event that is not substantially within the control of the 
customer or the Group.   

A  receivable  in  relation  to  these  services  is  recognised  on  settlement  of  the  client  matter  and  when  a  bill  has  been 
invoiced, as this is the point in time that the consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required 
before the payment is due. 

The Company  arranges for the disbursement  activities on  behalf  of the client; however it does not control  the  output 
from those activities.  The Company cannot influence the content of  the  medical reports or court filings, therefore no 
profit margin is recognised on the activities and the clients are charged the direct cost incurred by the Company.  As 
such,  the    Company  acts  as  an  agent  for  disbursements,  which  are  only  recognised  when  it  is  assessed  that  a 
reimbursement will be received from the client or on his or her behalf.  The disbursements are treated as a separate 
asset.  The amount recognised for the expected reimbursement does not exceed the relevant costs incurred. 

The amount of any expected reimbursement is reduced by an allowance for non-recovery based on past experience. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 50 

Slater and Gordon Limited  59

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

3.1 

Revenue from Contracts with Customers (continued) 

3.1.1  Accounting Policies (continued) 

When new businesses are acquired, there is a transition period during which time the Group’s practices and procedures 
are  embedded  into  the  operations  of  the  new  business.  Therefore  the  valuation  of  work  in  progress  acquired  in  a 
business combination may be adjusted during the period of provisional accounting for the acquisition. 

Provision of Legal Services – General Law Legal Services 

The  Group  also  earns  revenue  from  provision  of  general  legal  services,  incorporating  project  litigation.  Revenue  for 
general legal services is recognised over time in the accounting period when services are rendered.  

Fee  arrangements  from  general  legal  services  include  fixed  fee  arrangements,  unconditional  fee  for  service 
arrangements  (“time  and  materials”),  and  variable  or  contingent  fee  arrangements  (including  No  Win  –  No  Fee 
arrangements for services including project litigation, and some consumer and commercial litigation).  

For  fixed  fee  arrangements,  revenue  is  recognised  based  on  the  stage  of  completion  with  reference  to  the  actual 
services  provided  as  a  proportion  of  the  total  services  expected  to  be  provided  under  the  contract.  The  stage  of 
completion is tracked on a contract by contract basis using a milestone based approach, which was explained above. 

In  fee  for  service  contracts,  revenue  is  recognised  up  to  the  amount  of  fees  that  the  Group  is  entitled  to  invoice  for 
services performed to date based on contracted rates. 

The Group estimates fees for variable or conditional service fee arrangements using a most likely amount approach on 
a  contract  by  contract  basis.  Management  makes  a  detailed  assessment  of  the  amount  of  revenue  expected  to  be 
received and the probability of success of each case. Variable consideration is included in revenue only to the extent 
that  it  is  highly  probable  that  the  amount  will  not  be  subject  to  significant  reversal  when  the  uncertainty  is  resolved 
(generally when a matter is concluded).  

Certain  project  litigation  matters  are  undertaken  on  a  partially  funded  basis.  The  Group  has  arrangements  with  third 
party  funders  to  provide  a  portion  of  the  fees  receivable  on  a  matter  over  time  as  services  are  performed.  In  such 
arrangements, the funded portion of fees is billed regularly over time and is not contingent on the successful outcome 
of  the  litigation.    The  remaining  portion  of  fees  is  variable  consideration  which  is  conditional  on  the  successful 
resolution  of  the  litigation.    The  variable  consideration  is  included  in  revenue  as  services  are  performed  only  to  the 
extent  that  it  is  highly  probable  that  the  amount  will  not  be  subject  to  significant  reversal  when  the  uncertainty  is 
resolved. 

As  in  the  case  of  personal  injury  claims,  estimates  of  revenues,  costs  or  extent  of  progress  toward  completion  are 
revised if circumstances change. Any resulting increases or decreases in estimated revenues or costs are reflected in 
profit or loss in the period in which the circumstances that give rise to the revision become known by management. 

The  Group  has  determined  that  no  significant  financing  component  exists  in  respect  of  the  general  law  services 
revenue  streams.    This  has  been  determined  on  fee  for  service  and  fixed  fee  arrangements  as  the  period  between 
when  the  entity  transfers  a  promised  good  or  service  to  a  customer  and  when  the  customer  pays  for  that  good  or 
service will be one year or less.  For No Win - No Fee arrangements this has been determined because a significant 
amount  of  the  consideration  promised  by  the  customer  is  variable  subject  to  the  occurrence  or  non-occurrence  of  a 
future event that is not substantially within the control of the customer or the Group.   

A receivable in relation to these services is recognised when a bill has been invoiced, as this is the point in time that the 
consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required before the payment is due. 

Provision of Other Services – Slater Gordon Solutions 

Legal Services 

Revenue from Road Traffic Accidents (“RTA”) and Employer Liability/Public Liability (“EL/PL”) files is recognised over 
the life of the case based on prescribed milestones in a matter. 

The legal services practice operates on  the  basis  of No Win – No  Fee conditional fee  arrangements  and  applies  the 
same accounting policies as personal injury claims described above. In some cases, fees may be fixed, depending on 
the stage at which a matter concludes. For some arrangements, fees are fixed as a specified percentage of damages 
awarded under a claim. 

No revenue has been recognised for Noise Induced Hearing Loss (“NIHL”) files that are in progress as at 30 June 2016 
due to the low number of NIHL cases that have settled within SGS during the year and the inherent uncertainty over 
the consideration to be achieved in each successful matter. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 51 

60  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

3.1 

Revenue from Contracts with Customers (continued) 

3.1.1  Accounting Policies (continued) 

Vehicle Hire and Repair  

Revenue from the  provision of car repair is recognised at a point in time. Revenue from the  provision of car hire and 
cost recovery services are recognised over the time that the services are performed. 

For  car  repair  services,  revenue  is  recognised  upon  completion  of  all  repair  work  and  upon  the  customer  signing  a 
“client  satisfaction  note”  in  taking  back  possession  of  the  car.  The  amount  of  revenue  recognised  is  the  amount  as 
agreed in writing between the parties prior to the service being provided in the repair contract.  

For  car  hire  and  cost  recovery  services,  the  revenue  is  recognised  over  time,  being  the  period  between  the 
commencement of the car hire and settlement of costs through the Third Party Insurer (“TPI”). The amount of revenue 
recognised is the amount as agreed in writing between the parties prior to the service being provided in the hire rental 
agreement.   

Work  in  progress  is  only  included  in  revenue  to  the  extent  that  it  is  highly  probable  that  the  cumulative  amount  of 
revenue recognised in respect  of a contract at the end of a reporting period  will  not be subject to significant reversal 
when  a  matter  is  concluded.  A  dilution  rate  is  applied  on  the  invoice  to  recognise  the  fact  that  there  may  be  a 
settlement adjustment with the insurer if the insurer disputes any costs.  This also takes into account the fact that some 
cases may not be ‘no fault’. 

A receivable in relation to these services is recognised when a bill has been issued, as this is the point in time that the 
consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required before the payment is due. 

For car hire and repair services provided for not at fault clients, the Group acts as a principal. Although the services are 
provided  by  third  party  suppliers,  the  Group  has  the  primary  responsibility  to  ensure  that  the  services  have  been 
delivered  to  the  clients.  The  Group  cannot  vary  the  prices  set  by  the  supplier,  as  it  is  governed  by  an  industry 
framework and the Group collects the revenue from the customer and bears all credit risk. 

Revenue resulting from car hire and repair services within SGS Motor Services is recognised on a gross basis. 

Medical Reports and Rehabilitation Services  

Revenue from the provision of medical appointments and rehabilitation services is recognised at a point in time. 

For medical appointments, the revenue is recognised when the medical report is received from the medical expert. The 
amount of revenue recognised is based on the average fee per case calculated on a historic basis.  This value remains 
in  work in progress until the  medical  report is issued  to the Instructing  Party  (‘IP‘)  at which point the sales invoice  is 
raised. 

For  rehabilitation  services,  the  revenue  is  recognised  when  the  course  of  treatment  is  completed  and  the  final 
assessment or discharge report is issued to the IP. The amount of revenue recognised is based on the average fee per 
case  calculated  on  a  historic  basis.  This  value  remains  in  work  in  progress  until  the  final  assessment  or  discharge 
report is issued to the IP at which point the sales invoice is raised. 

A receivable in relation to these services is recognised when a bill has been issued, as this is the point in time that the 
consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required before the payment is due. 

Contract Costs 

Applying the practical expedient in paragraph 94 of AASB 15, the Group recognises the incremental costs of obtaining 
contracts as an expense when incurred.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 52 

Slater and Gordon Limited  61

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

3.1.2  Disaggregation of Revenue from Contracts with Customers 

The  Group  derives  revenue  from  the  transfer  of  goods  and  services  over  time  and  at  a  point  in  time,  in  the  major 
product lines of Personal Injury Law (“PIL”) and General Law (“GL”) and the geographical regions of Australia and the 
UK: 

 Australia 

PIL 
$’000 

GL 
$’000 

- 
- 
173,721 
173,721 

22,448 
29,532 
12,080 
64,060 

PIL 
$’000 

1,862 
5,025 
151,417 
158,304 

UK 
GL 
$’000 

10,066 
41,733 
2,464 
54,263 

SGS 
$’000 

72,098 
164,761 
204,263 
441,122 

Total 
$’000 

106,474 
241,051 
543,945 
891,470 

- 
- 
201,935 
201,935 

21,765 
27,923 
8,150 
57,838 

1,819 
10,330 
160,839 
172,988 

4,567 
43,281 
1,937 
49,785 

21,065 
- 
13,834 
34,899 

49,216 
81,534 
386,695 
517,445 

Year ended 30 June 
2016 

Type of contract: 
    Fixed price 
    Time and Materials 
    No Win – No Fee 
Revenue from contracts 
with customers 
Year ended 30 June 2015  
(restated) 
Type of contract: 
    Fixed price 
    Time and Materials 
    No Win – No Fee 
Revenue from contracts 
with customers 

3.2 

Expenses 

3.2.1  Accounting Policies 

Interest 

After  initial  recognition,  interest-bearing  loans  and  borrowings  are  subsequently  measured  at  amortised  cost  using  the 
effective  interest  method.  Amortised  cost  is  calculated  by  taking  into  account  any  issue  costs,  and  any  discount  or 
premium on settlement. 

Depreciation 

The  depreciable  amounts  of  all  property,  plant  and  equipment,  excluding  land,  are  depreciated  over  their  estimated 
useful lives, commencing from the time the asset is held ready for use. Leased assets are depreciated over the shorter of 
the lease term and their useful lives unless it is reasonably certain that the Group will obtain ownership by the end of the 
lease term. Land is not depreciated. 

The depreciation rates used for each class of assets are: 

Class of Fixed Asset 

Plant and equipment 

Low value asset pool 

Amortisation 

Depreciation Rates 

Depreciation Method 

5.00 – 66.67% 

18.75 – 37.50% 

Straight Line and Diminishing Value 

Diminishing Value 

Amortisation is calculated using a straight-line method to allocate the cost of intangible assets over their estimated useful 
lives.  Amortisation commences when the intangible asset is available for use. 

Software  development  costs  have  been  assessed  as  having  a  finite  useful  life  and  once  operating  in  the  Group  are 
amortised  over  the  useful  life  of  5-8  years.  Trademarks  that  have  been  assessed  as  having  a  finite  useful  life  are 
amortised over the useful life of 3 years. 

Share Based Payments 

The accounting policy for share based payments is included in Note 5.6. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 53 

62  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

3.2.2  Expense Analysis by Nature 

Finance costs expense 

Interest and fees on bank overdraft and loans (includes costs of borrowing) 
Interest on deferred consideration payable to vendor on acquisitions 
Interest on obligations under hire purchases 

Salaries and employee benefit expense 
Wages and salaries 
Post-employment benefits 
Share based payments expense 

Cost of sales 
Ancillary revenue  
Rendering of services – non-legal  

Depreciation and Amortisation 
Property, plant & equipment 
Software development 
Trademarks 

Research costs expensed 

3.3 

Cash Flow Information 

Reconciliation of profit for the period to cash flows from operating 
activities 
Profit after income tax 
Non-cash flows in profit from ordinary activities 
Notional interest on VCR share loans 
Depreciation and amortisation 
Goodwill impairment 
Share based payment expenses 
Accrual for payments to former owners 
Notional interest on deferred consideration 
Bad and doubtful debts 
Deferred costs of borrowing 
Gain from bargain purchase 
Notional FX loss 

Items shown in investing activities 
Costs associated with acquisition 
Proceeds from disposal of businesses 

Changes in assets and liabilities 
Increase in receivables 
Increase in other assets  
Decrease / (increase) in work in progress 
(Decrease) / increase in payables 
Decrease in income tax payable 
Increase in net deferred tax 
Increase in provisions 
Cash flows from operating activities 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 
8,739 
1,941 
530 
42,548            11,210 

41,293 
623 
632 

398,747 
16,290 
1,257 
416,294 

147,806 
22,491 
170,297 

8,195 
4,489 
5,059 
17,743 

249,148 
12,169 
2,031 
263,348 

14,493 
2,169 
16,662 

4,442 
1,807 
3,696 
9,945 

255 

- 

2016 
$’000 

(1,017,595) 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 

62,374 

(611) 
17,743 
879,506 
15,957 
18,529 
623 
39,342 
10,850 
- 
2,808 

(975) 
9,945 

- 
13,537 
13,933 
1,942 
11,585 
217 
(72,508) 

- 

738 
(168) 

23,662 

- 

(37,241) 
(1,284) 
40,486 
(70,573) 
(14,408) 
4,801 
6,253 

(104,244) 

(67,445) 
(2,690) 
(19,335) 
37,726 
(5,048) 
22,524 
11,318 
40,762 

Page 54 

Slater and Gordon Limited  63

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

3.4 

Income and Other Taxes  

3.4.1  Accounting Policies  

Income and other taxes consist of income tax, Goods and Services Tax and Value Added Tax. 

Income Tax 

Current  income  tax  expense  or  benefit  for  the  current  and  prior  periods  is  measured  at  the  amount  expected  to  be 
recovered from or  paid  to the tax  authorities.  The current  income  tax charge is calculated  on the  basis  of the tax  laws 
enacted or substantively enacted at the end of the reporting period in the countries where the Group operates. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised for temporary differences at the applicable tax rates when the  assets 
are  expected  to  be  recovered  or  liabilities  are  settled.  Deferred  tax  liabilities  are  not  recognised  if  they  arise  from  the 
initial  recognition  of  goodwill.  Deferred  tax  is  also  not  accounted  for  if  it  arises  from  initial  recognition  of  an  asset  or 
liability in a transaction, other than a business combination, and at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting 
nor taxable profit or loss. 

Deferred tax assets are reviewed at each reporting date and are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that 
the  related  tax  benefit  will  be  realised.  Unrecognised  deferred  tax  assets  are  reassessed  at  each  reporting  date  and 
recognised to the extent that it has become probable that future taxable profits will be available against which they can 
be used.  

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the year when the asset is 
realised or the liability is settled, based on tax rates (and tax laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted at 
the reporting date. 

Current  and  deferred  tax  for  the  year  are  recognised  in  profit  or  loss,  except  when  they  relate  to  items  that  are 
recognised  in  other  comprehensive  income  or  directly  in  equity,  in  which  case  the  current  and  deferred  tax  are  also 
recognised  in  other  comprehensive  income  or  directly  in  equity  respectively.  Where  current  tax  or  deferred  tax  arises 
from  the  initial  accounting  for  a  business  combination,  the  tax  effect  is  included  in  the  accounting  for  the  business 
combination. 

Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements 

Deferred  tax  assets  and  liabilities  are  based  on  the  assumption  that  no  adverse  change  will  occur  in  the  income  tax 
legislation both in Australia and the UK and the anticipation that the Group will derive sufficient future assessable income 
to enable the benefit to be realised and comply with the conditions of deductibility imposed by the law. 

Deferred  tax  assets  are  recognised  only  if  management  considers  it  is  probable  that  future  taxable  amounts  will  be 
available to utilise those temporary differences and losses. 

Goods and Services Tax (“GST”) and Value Added Tax (“VAT”) 

Revenue, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of GST/VAT, except where the GST/VAT incurred is 
not recoverable from the Australian Taxation Office (“ATO”), UK Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (“HMRC”) or Malta 
Inland  Revenue  (“MIR”)  and  is  therefore  recognised  as  part  of  the  asset’s  cost  or  as  part  of  the  expense  item. 
Receivables and payables are stated inclusive of GST/VAT. 

The net amount of GST/VAT recoverable from, or payable to, the ATO/HMRC/MIR is included as part of receivables or 
payables in the consolidated statement of financial position. 

The major components of income tax expense are: 

Consolidated statement of profit or loss 

Current income tax (benefit)/expense 
Adjustment for current tax relating to prior periods 
Deferred income tax relating to the origination and reversal of temporary differences 

Consolidated statement of OCI 
Deferred tax credit arising on revaluation of cash flow hedges 
Deferred tax charge arising on foreign exchange gain on revaluation of loans 

Income tax recognised directly in equity 
Current tax credit on share issue costs 

2016 
$’000 

(9,482) 
(12,167) 
9,776 

(11,873) 

(144) 
(310) 

(454) 

(26) 

(26) 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 

11,981 
(1,072) 
12,125 

23,034 

(150) 
5,190 

5,040 

(7) 

(7) 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 55 

64  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

3.4.2 

Income Tax Expense 

Deferred income tax expense included in income tax expense 
Decrease in deferred tax assets 
Deferred income tax relating to items charged to OCI 
Deferred income tax relating to items charged directly to equity 
(Decrease)/increase in deferred tax liabilities 
Recoup prior year losses and over/under on prior year losses 
Net deferred taxes arising from changes in accounting standards 
Net deferred taxes arising on business combinations 
Exchange differences 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 

41,505 
454 
26 
(31,138) 
- 
- 
- 
(1,071) 

9,776 

(64,958) 
(5,040) 
7 
41,084 
(78) 
2,839 
36,162 
2,109 

12,125 

The prima facie tax payable on profit before tax differs from the income tax expense 
as follows: 

Accounting (loss)/profit before tax 

At the Australian statutory income tax rate of 30% (2015: 30%) 

(1,029,468) 

(308,840) 

85,408 

25,622 

Non-deductible expenses 
Non-assessable income 
Adjustments in respect to prior periods 
Difference in overseas tax rate 
Deferred tax assets not recognised 
Deferred tax assets now recognised 
Other 

Income tax (benefit)/expense 

3.4.3  Recognised Tax Assets and Liabilities 

Current tax assets 
Balance at the beginning of the year 
Balance acquired per SGS acquisition 
Tax (refunded)/paid 

Adjustments in respect to prior periods 
Exchange differences 

Balance at the end of the year 

Current tax liability 
Balance at the beginning of the year 
Balances arising from business acquisitions 
Current income tax benefit/(expense) 
Tax paid 
Adjustments in respect of prior periods 
Losses utilised 

Exchange differences 

Balance at the end of the year 

212,724 
(3,016) 
175 
74,116 
12,968 
- 
- 

(11,873) 

8,520 
(15,303) 
(1,068) 
883 
4,273 
(5) 
112 

23,034 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000  
Restated 

34,636 
- 
(29,464) 

9,215 
2,416 

16,803 

(23,412) 
- 
9,482 
6,289 
2,937 
(4,597) 

- 

- 
29,041 
5,595 

- 
- 

34,636 

(2,465) 
(13,977) 
(11,981) 
6,049 
(785) 
- 

(253) 

(9,301) 

(23,412) 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 56 

Slater and Gordon Limited  65

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

3.4.3  Recognised Tax Assets and Liabilities (continued) 

Deferred tax assets 
Provision for impairment 
Employee benefits 

Provision for legal costs 
Accruals  
Non-deducted business related costs 
Fair value of cash flow hedges  
Unrendered WIP and disbursements not yet deducted 
Property, plant and equipment 
Other 
Revenue losses carried forward 
Advanced Company Income Tax (“ACIT”) refund in Malta 
Deductible goodwill 

Balance at the end of the year 

Deferred tax liabilities 

Prepayments 
Work in progress 
Unrendered disbursements 

Intangibles/Goodwill  
Foreign currency translation reserve 
Other 

Balance at the end of the year 

3.4.4  Unrecognised Deferred Tax Assets 

2016 
$’000 

3,521 
6,931 

552 
2,788 
144 
521 
326 
- 
1,577 
26,811 
3,554 
- 

46,725 

2015 
$’000  
Restated 

13,474 
6,602 

378 
3,122 
251 
378 
15,752 
706 
2,119 
26,269 
12,490 
6,689 

88,230 

(629) 
(77,987) 
(12,156) 

(17,179) 
(6,424) 
1,425 

(917) 
(110,575) 
(15,036) 

(9,779) 
(7,276) 
(505) 

(112,950) 

(144,088) 

At 30 June 2016 the Group has unrecognised deferred tax assets of $53.6m mainly relating to unrecognised tax losses 
as well as costs incurred for Trademarks and acquisition costs. No deferred tax has been recognised for these costs as 
the Group  does not plan to  dispose  of the relevant  subsidiaries in the foreseeable future.  A portion of the  deferred  tax 
asset on tax losses carried forward is also unrecognised. 

3.5 

Dividends 

Dividends paid during the year 
Dividends on ordinary shares 
No interim dividend paid for 2016 (2015: 3.50 cents, partially franked (40%)) 

Final dividend for 2015 partially franked (40%): 5.50 cents (2014: 5.00 cents, fully 
franked ) 

Total dividends paid during the year 

Dividends proposed and not recognised as a liability 
Dividends on ordinary shares 
No final dividend proposed for 2016 (2015: 5.50 cents, partially franked (40%)) 

Franking credit balance 

Balance of franking  account at year end adjusted for franking credits arising from 
payment of provision for income tax and after deducting franking credits to be used 
in payment of proposed dividends: 
Impact  on  franking  account  of  dividend  recommended  by  the  directors  since  the 
year end but not recognised as a liability at year end: 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 

- 

7,341 

19,330 

19,330 

10,279 

17,620 

- 

19,330 

844 

891 

- 

3,307 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 57 

66  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

3.6 

(Loss)/Earnings per Share 

The following reflects the income and share data used in the calculations of basic and diluted (loss)/earnings per share: 

2016     
$’000 

2015     

 $’000 
Restated 

(Loss)/earnings used in calculating basic and diluted earnings per share 

(1,017,306) 

62,288 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating basic 
(loss)/earnings per share (‘000’s) 

Adjusted weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating diluted 
(loss)/earnings per share (‘000’s) 

351,907 

234,842 

352,085 

236,522 

Note 4: Assets and Liabilities   

This  section  shows  the  assets  used  to  generate  the  Group’s revenue  and  the  liabilities  incurred  as  a  result.  Liabilities 
relating to the Group’s financing activities are disclosed in Section 5. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are disclosed in 
note 3.4. 

On the following pages there are notes covering intangible assets, working capital, work in progress, other non-current 
assets, payables and provisions. 

4.1 

Intangible Assets  

4.1.1  Accounting Policies 

Goodwill 

Goodwill is initially measured at cost (being the excess of the aggregate of the consideration transferred and the amount 
recognised  for  non-controlling  interests)  and  any  previous  interest  held  over  the  net  identifiable  assets  acquired  and 
liabilities assumed. 

Goodwill is not amortised, but is tested annually for impairment or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances 
indicate that it might be impaired. Goodwill is carried at cost less any accumulated impairment losses.  

Software Development Costs 

Expenditure on research activities is recognised as an expense in the period in which it is incurred. 

Development costs are capitalised when it is probable that the project will be a success considering its commercial and 
technical feasibility; the entity  is able to use or sell the asset; the entity  has sufficient resources and intent to complete 
the  development  and  its  costs  can  be  measured  reliably.  Capitalised  development  expenditure  is  stated  at  cost  less 
accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment losses.  

Trademarks and Brand Names 

Trademarks acquired in a business combination and recognised separately from goodwill are initially recognised at their 
fair  value  at  the  acquisition  date  (which  is  regarded  as  their  cost).  The  fair  value  of  trademarks  is  based  on  the 
discounted estimated royalty payments that have been avoided as a result of the trademark being owned. 

Trademarks are carried at cost less accumulated amortisation and any accumulated impairment losses.  

Brand names acquired as part of the acquisition of Slater Gordon Solutions have been carried at cost. These brand 
names have been assessed as having an indefinite useful life, based on the Company’s long-term strategy for using the 
asset, therefore no amortisation is applicable but they are tested annually for impairment or more frequently if events or 
changes in circumstances indicate that they might be impaired. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 58 

Slater and Gordon Limited  67

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

4.1 

Intangible Assets (continued) 

Gross Cost 
Accumulated amortisation   

At 30 June 2015 (restated)* 

Gross Cost 
Accumulated amortisation   
Accumulated impairment loss 

At 30 June 2016 

Movement in carrying amounts 
Balance at 1 July 2014 
Additions 
Additions through acquisition of entities 
Reclassification from plant & equipment 
Exchange differences 
Amortisation expense 
Disposals 

Balance at 30 June 2015 (restated)* 

Additions 
Exchange differences 
Amortisation expense 
Impairment expense 
Disposals 
Balance at 30 June 2016  

Goodwill 
$’000 
1,269,456 
- 

1,269,456 

1,119,599 
- 
(786,731) 

332,868 

108,492 
- 
1,121,611 
- 
39,353 
- 
- 

1,269,456 

- 
(57,082) 
- 
(879,506) 
- 

332,868 

Software 
Development 
$’000 
38,984 
(19,908) 

19,076 

38,006 
(20,597) 
- 

17,409 

5,105 
9,970 
3,724 
1,995 
149 
(1,807) 
(60) 

19,076 

5,314 
(2,437) 
(4,489) 
- 
(55) 

17,409 

Trademarks & 
Brand Names 
$’000 

60,173 
(5,481) 

54,692 

53,452 
(9,759) 
- 

43,693 

10,058 
- 
46,578 
- 
1,752 
(3,696) 
- 

54,692 

- 
(5,940) 
(5,059) 
- 
- 

43,693 

Total 
$’000 

1,368,613 
(25,389) 

1,343,224 

1,211,057 
(30,356) 
(786,731) 

393,970 

123,655 
9,970 
1,171,913 
1,995 
41,254 
(5,503) 
(60) 

1,343,224 

5,314 
(65,459) 
(9,548) 
(879,506) 
(55) 

393,970 

* Reflects adjustments made for finalisation of the accounting for acquired entities under AASB 3 Business Combinations. 

4.1.2 

Impairment Testing of Goodwill and Indefinite Life Intangible Assets 

For  the  purposes  of  impairment  testing,  assets  are  grouped  at  the  lowest  levels  for  which  there  are  separately 
identifiable,  largely  independent  cash  inflows  (cash  generating  units  “CGU’s”).  Goodwill  and  indefinite  life  intangible 
assets are allocated to CGU’s according to applicable business operations as follows: 

AUS                

AUS           

PIL 

GL 

UK 
PIL 

UK 
GL 

UK 
SGS 

Total 

2016 

Goodwill recognised ($’000) 

Indefinite life intangibles ($’000) 

5,637 

57 

- 

- 

43,788 

1,715 

- 

- 

283,443 

41,921 

332,868 

43,693 

2015 (restated) 

Goodwill recognised ($’000) 

47,499 

13,939 

Indefinite life intangibles ($’000) 

57 

- 

50,843 

1,956 

9,574 

1,147,601 

1,269,456 

- 

47,823 

49,836 

Impairment testing is completed  at least annually for goodwill, intangible assets not yet  ready for use and indefinite life 
intangible assets or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the asset may be impaired. 

An impairment loss is recognised where the carrying amount of the asset or CGU exceeds its recoverable amount. The 
recoverable amount of an asset or CGU is defined as the higher of its fair value less costs of disposal and value-in-use.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 59 

68  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

4.1.2 

Impairment Testing of Goodwill and Indefinite Life Intangible Assets (continued) 

Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements 

Determining whether goodwill is impaired requires an estimation of the value-in-use of the CGU’s to which goodwill has 
been  allocated. The  value-in-use calculation requires management to estimate the future cash flows expected to  arise 
from the CGU and a post-tax discount rate that reflects the current market assessments of the time value of money and 
the  risks  specific  to  the  asset  in  order  to  calculate  present  value.  Where  the  actual  future  cash  flows  are  less  than 
expected, a material impairment loss may arise. 

4.1.3 

Impairment Losses Recognised 

The Group considered the  relationship  between its market capitalisation and  the book value  of  its equity,  among  other 
factors,  when  reviewing  for  indicators  of  impairment.  As  at  31  December  2015,  the  market  capitalisation  of  the  Group 
was  below  the  book  value  of  its  equity,  indicating  a  potential  impairment  of  goodwill  and  other  assets.  In  addition,  the 
performance  of the UK  business had  not  been in line with  the Directors’  expectations  and  internal forecasts and there 
was  an  indication  that  the  business  would  be  adversely  impacted  by  changes  in  the  UK  regulatory  environment  in 
relation to the proposals from the Autumn 2015 Chancellor’s statement. Furthermore, the Australian General Law (“GL”) 
business and, in some states, the Australian Personal Injury Law (“PIL”) businesses had not met acquisition targets.  

As a result, management performed an impairment test as at 31 December 2015 for all CGUs. The impairment test was 
based on value-in-use methodology.  

A further assessment  was performed as  to whether there  were any indicators of impairment in relation to the CGUs in 
accordance  with  AASB  136.  The  NSW  Government  announced  proposals  to  change  the  circumstances  in  which  a 
person injured in a car accident may claim compensation. If the proposals succeed any impact is not likely to occur until 
2019/2020.  Notwithstanding  the  uncertainty  of  the  impact  of  the  proposals,  management  have  impaired  the  remaining 
NSW PI goodwill balance of $3.1m at 30 June 2016. 

Given the level of impairment taken in the UK business as at 31 December 2015 and the continued potential impact from 
regulatory change  as a result of the Autumn 2015 Chancellor’s statement, and the  added impact of the “Brexit” vote in 
July 2016, management performed an impairment test as at 30 June 2016 for the UK CGUs. The impairment test was 
based on value-in-use methodology. The result of that impairment testing was that no further impairment was identified 
for the UK CGUs to that recognised at 31 December 2015. 

The following CGUs were impaired during the year ended 30 June 2016: 

CGU 

Slater & Gordon Solutions (SGS) 
UK – GL 
Australia – PIL NSW, QLD and WA 
Australia – GL 

Impairment loss  
$’000 

Recoverable amount 
$’000 

814,245 
9,458 
41,864 
13,939 

504,561 
45,207 
101,676 
19,565 

At 30 June 2015, goodwill for Australia was tested  at the operating segment level, being GL and PIL. At 31 December 
2015 and 30 June 2016 goodwill for PIL was tested for impairment at a more disaggregated state level.  

4.1.4  Key Assumptions used in value-in-use calculations and sensitivity to changes in Assumptions 

Discount rates used in the calculation of value-in-use at 30 June 2016 

Australian CGUs 

A post-tax discount rate of 9.25% (30 June 2015: 9.25%) was used for all Australian CGUs.  

United Kingdom CGUs 

A post-tax discount rate of 9.25% was used for each of the 3 UK CGUs (30 June 2015: 10.45% for SGS and 9.25% for 
UK  PIL  and  UK  GL).  The  discount  rate  for  SGS  was  assessed  at  a  higher  rate  at  30  June  2015  due  to  the  recent 
acquisition of SGS by the Group at that date and the inherent risk that new acquisitions carry with them, as well as the 
risk  characteristics  of  the  forecast  cash  flows.  For  the  current  year  a  risk  adjustment  and  updated  assumptions  have 
been included in the cash flow to reflect uncertainty in the UK legal market rather than adjusting the discount rate.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 60 

Slater and Gordon Limited  69

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

4.1.4  Key  Assumptions  used  in  value-in-use  calculations  and  sensitivity  to  changes  in  Assumptions 

(continued) 

Cash Flow Forecasts used in the calculation of Value-in-Use 

Value-in-use was calculated using approved forecasts covering a period of five years for each of the individual CGU’s.  
The  average  growth  rates  used  in  the  value-in-use  calculation  for  the  next  five  years range  between  -6.5%  and  4.6%.  
The negative rates relate to the impact of the UK Autumn 2015 Chancellor’s statement (referred to below) in the Slater 
and Gordon Solutions (SGS) CGU.  Cash flows beyond five years were subject to a terminal growth rate of 2.5% for all 
CGUs (30 June 2015: 3.0%). 

Key assumptions underlying cash flow forecasts were: 

For  each  of  the  CGUs,  performance  in  the  financial  year  ending  30  June  2017  was  based  upon  the  Board  approved 
budget. 

Australia – GL 

The cash flow  forecasts  used in the impairment test showed operating  cash  outflows in all periods  covered by  the  five 
year model. Accordingly, management fully impaired the goodwill of $13.9m in the Australian GL CGU. 

Australia – PIL 

Value-in-use was calculated separately for the PIL business in each state. The cash flow forecasts in New South Wales 
(“NSW”) and Queensland reflect the impact of regulatory change to workers’ compensation. In other states the forecasts 
assumed an average growth consistent with growth rates experienced over the last three years in the five year forecast 
period.  The  value-in-use  calculation  resulted  in  impairment  losses  in  Queensland,  New  South  Wales  and  Western 
Australia as at 31 December 2015 which were recorded in the 31 December 2015 financial report. As at 30 June 2016 
the recoverable amounts for each of these CGUs, with the exception of NSW, exceeded the carrying amounts and there 
are no reasonably possible changes that could cause the recoverable amounts to be less than the carrying amounts. An 
impairment of $3.1m was recorded in relation to goodwill allocated to the NSW CGU at 30 June 2016. 

The remaining aggregate carrying amount of goodwill in the Australian PIL CGUs after impairment is $5.6m. 

United Kingdom Businesses 

The  proposals  from  the  Autumn  2015  Chancellor’s  statement  announced  in  November  2015  are  expected  to  affect 
personal injury claims below £5,000. The cash flow forecasts for the UK businesses assume that the proposed reforms 
will  be  implemented  as  announced  and  will  affect  forecast  fees  beginning  from  July  2018.  The  forecasts  assume  that 
fees on claims below the £5,000 threshold will be significantly impacted, with a proportionate reduction in direct operating 
costs. Management’s estimate of the impact is based on the current proportion of total fees that represent claims below 
the  threshold.  Management  expects  that  the  UK  businesses  will  be  able  to  take  advantage  of  other  opportunities 
following these proposed reforms, however given the inherent uncertainty regarding any such opportunities they have not 
yet been reflected in the cash flow forecasts. 

The cash flow forecasts assume a steady state for practice areas that are not affected by the proposed reforms in the 
five year forecast period. 

Sensitivity  

Increases in the discount rate in the impairment analysis of the SGL PI CGU from 9.25% to 13.5% or a reduction in the 
cash flows of the CGU by 50% in the terminal year would result in the recoverable amount to be less than the carrying 
amount.  

Increases  in the discount rate  in the  impairment  analysis  of the SGS CGU from  9.25% to 10.5%, or  a reduction in the 
cash flows of the CGU by 15% in the terminal year would result in the recoverable amount to be less than the carrying 
amount.  

4.2 

Receivables 

4.2.1  Accounting Policies 

Collectability of trade debtors is reviewed at each reporting period. Management considers whether further impairment of 
debtors is required based on the  aging profile and use calculated historical rates of recovery to determine the required 
impairment. Debts that are known to be uncollectible are written off when identified. 

Disbursements are only recognised when it is assessed that a reimbursement will be received from the client or on his or 
her behalf. The disbursements are treated as a separate asset. The amount recognised for the expected reimbursement 
does not exceed the relevant costs incurred. The amount of any expected reimbursement is reduced by an allowance for 
non-recovery based on past experience. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 61 

70  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

4.2 

Receivables (continued) 

Current 

Trade debtors 
Impairment of trade debtors 

Disbursements 
Allowance for non-recovery 

Other receivables 

Non-current 
Disbursements 
Allowance for non-recovery 

Impairment of receivables 

Balance at beginning of the year 

Receivables written off as uncollectible 
Provision for impairment recognised, including balances from business 
acquisitions 
Provision for discount 

Foreign exchange translation differences 

Balance at end of the year 

4.3  Work in Progress 

4.3.1  Accounting Policies 

2016 
$’000 

299,502 
(92,824) 

206,678 

340,605 
(20,035) 

320,570 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 

371,138 
(104,327) 

266,811 

 346,257  
(47,514) 

298,743 

1,667 

8,741 

528,915 

574,295 

88,991 
(80,138) 

8,853 

 78,547  
(46,803) 

 31,744  

(104,327) 

835 

(9,059) 

7,856 
11,871 

(8,690) 

2,980 

(94,434) 

- 

(4,183) 

(92,824) 

(104,327) 

Work in progress represents client cases which have not yet reached a conclusion and comprises personal injury cases, 
services  performed  ancillary  to  personal  injury  cases,  non-personal  injury  cases  and  project  litigation  cases.  Refer  to 
note 3.1 for further details. 

Contracts  for  legal  services  are  billed  based  on  time  incurred.  As  permitted  under  AASB  15,  the  transaction  price 
allocated to the unsatisfied or partially unsatisfied performance obligations under these contracts has not been disclosed. 

The Group allocates work in progress between current and non-current classifications based on a  historical analysis of 
the Group’s work in progress balances and velocity rates to determine expected timing of settlements.  

Current 
Non-personal injury 
Personal injury 
Project litigation 

Non-current 
Non-personal injury 
Personal injury 
Project litigation 

2016 
$’000 

17,493 
333,792 
10,613 
361,898 

- 

224,174 
1,461 
225,635 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 
21,421 
429,225 
4,121 
454,767 

718 
218,575 
2,634 
221,927 

Work in progress has decreased during the year ended 30 June 2016 by $89.2m. Of this decrease $41.3m is largely due 
to a decline in case volumes in the Australian and UK PIL practice and the resolution of acquired work in progress during 
the period. The remaining decrease is as a result of the decline in the GBP foreign exchange rate during the year. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 62 

Slater and Gordon Limited  71

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

4.4 

Property, Plant and Equipment 

4.4.1  Accounting Policies 

Property,  plant  and  equipment  is  measured  at  cost  less  accumulated  depreciation  and  any  accumulated  impairment 
losses. 

An asset’s residual value and useful life is reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at the end of each reporting period. Any 
depreciation and impairment losses of an asset are recognised in the profit or loss.  

Gains and losses on disposal are determined by comparing proceeds with the carrying amount. These gains and losses 
are included in the profit or loss when the asset is derecognised. 

Gross Cost 
Less accumulated depreciation 
At 30 June 2015 (restated) 

Gross Cost 
Less accumulated depreciation 
At 30 June 2016  

Movement in carrying amounts 
Balance at 1 July 2014 
Additions 
Additions through acquisition of entities 
Reclassification of plant & equipment 
Exchange differences 
Depreciation expense 
Disposals 

Balance at 30 June 2015 

Additions 
Reclassification of plant & equipment 
Exchange differences 
Depreciation expense 
Disposals 

Balance at 30 June 2016 

Plant & 
Equipment 
$’000 

Land & 
Buildings 
$’000 

Low Value 
Asset Pool 
$’000 

74,350 
(43,514) 
30,836 

77,345 
(45,173) 
32,172 

12,450 
16,823 
7,389 
(2,140) 
581 
(4,153) 
(114) 

30,836 

12,443 
(40) 

(2,478) 

(7,825) 

(764) 

32,172 

302 
- 
302 

265 
- 
265 

- 
- 

157 

145 

- 

- 

- 

302 

- 

- 

(37) 

- 

- 

265 

2,442 
(1,621) 
821 

2,877 
(2,107) 
770 

514 
515 
81 

- 

- 

(289) 

- 

821 

300 

40 

(21) 

(370) 

- 

770 

Total 
$’000 

77,094 
(45,135) 
31,959 

80,487 
(47,280) 
33,207 

12,964 
17,338 

7,627 

(1,995) 

581 

(4,442) 

(114) 

31,959 

12,743 

- 

(2,536) 

(8,195) 

(764) 

33,207 

The  carrying  amount  of  plant  and  equipment  under  finance  lease  included  above  amounted  to  $6,784,000  (30  June 
2015: $6,493,000). 

4.5 

Payables 

4.5.1  Accounting Policies 

Trade creditors and accruals are carried at amortised cost and represent liabilities for goods and services provided to the 
Group prior to the end of the financial year that are unpaid and arise when the Group becomes obliged to make future 
payments in respect of the purchase of these goods and services. 

Legal creditors are carried at cost and represent liabilities in relation to disbursements where there is an agreement with 
the  vendor  that  payment  will  not  be  made  by  the  Group  until  the  Group  has  received  payment  from  any  settlement 
proceeds on the matter. 

Vendor  liabilities  are  carried  at  net  present  value  and  refer  to  deferred  consideration  payable  to  vendors  in  relation  to 
previous acquisitions. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 63 

72  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

4.5 

Payables (continued) 

Current 
Unsecured liabilities 
Trade creditors and accruals 
Legal creditors 
Vendor liabilities - acquisitions 

Non-current 
Unsecured liabilities 
Vendor liabilities - acquisitions 

4.6 

Provisions 

4.6.1  Accounting Policies 

2016 
$’000 

173,672 
287,655 
2,243 
463,570 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 

257,164 
336,588 
18,918 
612,670 

510 

3,121 

Non-employee provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of 
past  events,  for  which  it  is  probable  that  an  outflow  of  economic  benefits  will  result  in  an  amount  that  can  be  reliably 
measured. 

Solicitor Liability Claims – Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements 

A provision for solicitor liability claims is made for the potential future cost of claims brought against the Group by former 
clients. The provision relates to open claims and potential future claims as identified at the end of the reporting  period. 
The  provision  is  determined  based  on  historical  data,  taking  into  account  the  nature  of  the  existing  claim,  expected 
reimbursed  expense  and  includes  the  estimated  maximum  amount  payable  by  the  Group  under  its  Professional 
Indemnity Insurance Policy on all claims notified to its insurer. 

Employee Benefits 

Liabilities arising in respect of wages and salaries, annual leave and any other employee benefits expected to be settled 
within  twelve  months  of  the  reporting  date  are  measured  at  the  amounts  based  on  remuneration  rates  which  are 
expected to be paid when the liability is settled. Liabilities arising later than one year have been measured at the present 
value of the estimated future cash outflows to be made for those benefits. These estimated future cash flows have been 
discounted using market yields, at the reporting date, on corporate bonds with matching terms to maturity. 

A bonus provision is recognised when it is payable in accordance with the employee’s contract of employment and the 
amount can be reliably measured.  

A provision for termination benefits is recognised when the entity can no longer withdraw the offer of those benefits, or if 
earlier,  when  the  termination  benefits  are  included  in  a  formal  restructuring  plan  that  has  been  announced  to  those 
affected by it.  

Employee benefit obligations are presented as current liabilities if the entity does not have an unconditional right to defer 
settlement  for  at  least  twelve  months  after  the  reporting  date,  regardless  of  when  the  actual  settlement  is  expected  to 
occur. 

Onerous Contracts 

An  onerous contract is a contract in which the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the contract exceed 
the economic benefits expected to be received under it. The unavoidable costs are the lower of the cost of fulfilling the 
contract and any compensation or penalties arising from failure to fulfil the contract. The economic benefits expected to 
be received include direct and indirect benefits under the contract and contractual and non-contractual benefits. 

A provision for onerous contracts is measured at the present value of the lower of the expected cost of terminating the 
contract  and  the  expected  net  cost  of  continuing  with  the  contract.  Before  a  provision  is  established,  the  Group 
recognises any impairment loss on the assets associated with that contract. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 64 

Slater and Gordon Limited  73

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

4.6 

Provisions (continued) 

Current 
Employee benefits 
Solicitor liability claims 
Provision for onerous contracts 
Provision for payments to former owners 

Non-current 

Employee benefits 
Provision for onerous contacts 
Other non-current provisions 

4.7 

Fair Value Measurements 

4.7.1  Accounting Policies 

Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements 

2016 
$’000 

19,700 
9,158 
4,160 
19,437 

52,455 

3,404 
3,804 
7,829 

15,037 

2015 
$’000 

Restated 

18,641 
6,067 
2,467 
11,142 

38,317 

3,366 
3,978 
9,930 
17,274 

When measuring the fair value of an asset or a liability, the Group uses observable market data as far as possible. Fair 
values are categorised into different levels in a fair value hierarchy based on the inputs used in the valuation techniques 
as follows: 

•  Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the entity can access at the 

measurement date; 

•  Level 2: inputs, other than quoted prices included within Level 1, that are observable for the asset or liability, either 

directly or indirectly; and 

•  Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data. 

If the inputs used to measure the fair value of an asset or a liability fall into different levels of the fair value hierarchy, then 
the fair value measurement is categorised in its entirety in the same level of the fair value hierarchy as the lowest level 
input that is significant to the entire measurement. 

4.7.2  Fair Value Hierarchy 

30 June 2016 
Recurring fair value measurements 

Financial liabilities 
Derivative financial instruments – interest rate swaps 
Contingent consideration * 

30 June 2015  
Recurring fair value measurements 

Financial liabilities 
Derivative financial instruments – interest rate swaps 

Contingent consideration * 

* Included in Vendor Liabilities  

Level 1 
$’000 

Level 2 
$’000 

Level 3 
$’000 

- 
- 
- 

2,841 
- 
2,841 

- 
2,977 
2,977 

Level 1 
$’000 

Level 2 
$’000 

Level 3 
$’000 

- 

- 
- 

1,621 

- 
1,621 

- 

6,090 
6,090 

Total 
$’000 

2,841 
2,977 
5,818 

Total 
$’000 

1,621 

6,090 
7,711 

4.7.3  Valuation Techniques and Inputs used in Level 2 and 3 Fair Value Measurements 

The fair value of the interest rate swaps is measured with reference to market data which can be used to estimate future 
cash  flows.  The  key  input  into  this  valuation  is  the  interest  rate  swap  revaluation  statement  as  provided  by  Westpac 
Banking Corporation and National Australia Bank. 

The fair value of contingent consideration payable in a business combination is measured with reference to current fee 
and  performance  forecasts  which  can  be used  to estimate  future cash flows. The  key inputs into this  valuation are the 
estimated  future  cash  flows  and  the  average  discount  rate  of  9%  (30  June  2015:  9%)  used  to  determine  the  present 
value the future cash flows. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 65 

74  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

4.7.4  Reconciliation of recurring Level 3 Fair Value Movements 

Opening balance 

Acquisitions 
Payments relating to contingent consideration 
Adjustment to contingent consideration 
Interest  
Exchange differences 

Closing balance 

2016 
$’000 

6,090 

- 
(3,455) 
- 
342 
- 

2,977 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 
7,927 

4,185 
(1,865) 
(4,983) 
378 
448 

6,090 

There  has  been  no  change  in  the  range  of  undiscounted  contingent  consideration  outcomes  during  the  year.  A 
reasonable movement in the unobservable inputs would not significantly impact the fair value of contingent consideration 
as at the end of the reporting period and therefore not impact profit after tax and equity. 

Note 5: Capital Structure and Financing   

This section outlines how the Group manages its capital structure and related financing costs, including its balance sheet 
liquidity and access to capital markets. 

When  managing  capital,  management’s  objective  is  to  ensure  the  Group  continues  to  maintain  optimal  returns  to 
shareholders  and  benefits  for  other  stakeholders.  This  is  achieved  through  the  monitoring  of  historical  and  forecast 
performance and cash flows. 

5.1 

Cash and Cash Equivalents 

5.1.1  Accounting Policies 

Cash  and  cash  equivalents  comprise  cash  on  hand,  deposits  held  at  call  with  banks  and  short-term  deposits  with  an 
original maturity of three months or less. For the purposes  of the consolidated statement of cash flows, cash and cash 
equivalents consist of cash and cash equivalents as defined above, net of outstanding banking overdrafts. 

Cash  flows  are  presented  in  the  statement  of  cash  flows  on  a  gross  basis,  except  for  the  GST/VAT  component  of 
investing and financing activities, which are disclosed as operating cash flows.  

5.2 

Financing Arrangements 

5.2.1  Accounting Policies 

Borrowing Costs 

Borrowing costs can include interest expense, finance charges in respect of finance leases, amortisation of discounts or 
premiums, ancillary costs relating to borrowings, and exchange  differences arising from foreign currency borrowings to 
the extent that they are regarded as an adjustment to interest costs.  

Borrowing costs are expensed in the period which they are incurred, except for borrowing costs incurred as part of the 
cost of the construction of a qualifying asset which are capitalised until the asset is ready for its intended use or sale. 

5.2.2  Financing Arrangements 

The Group has net assets of $305.1m, which have decreased by $1,045.1m since 30 June 2015 primarily due to a non-
cash impairment charge of $879.5m and the  adoption of AASB 15.  The Group  has net current assets of $477.9m (30 
June 2015: $498.0m). 

The  Group  entered  into  a  multi-currency  (AUD/GBP)  Syndicated  Facility  Agreement  (“SFA”)  in  May  2015.  This  facility 
was  amended  in  May  2016  with  the  following  structure  and  maturity  profile  (these  facilities  will  be  referred  to 
subsequently as ‘bills of exchange’): 

•  a  GBP  157,500,000  term  loan  facility. This facility  expires  on  29 May  2018  and interest  is  charged  on the loans  at 

LIBOR plus an agreed margin; 

•  a GBP 157,500,000 term loan facility. This facility expires on 31 March 2019 and interest is charged on the loans at 

LIBOR plus an agreed margin; 

•  a  GBP  60,000,000  term  loan  facility,  bank  guarantee  facility  and/or  letter  of  credit.  This  facility  expires  on  29  May 

2018 and interest is charged on the loans at LIBOR plus an agreed margin; 

•  an AUD  45,000,000  term  loan  facility. This facility  expires  on  29 May  2018  and interest  is  charged  on the loans  at 

BBSY Bid plus an agreed margin; and 

•  an AUD 45,000,000 term loan facility. This facility expires on 31 March 2019 and interest is charged on the loans at 

BBSY Bid plus an agreed margin. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 66 

Slater and Gordon Limited  75

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

5.2.2 

Financing Arrangements (continued) 

The key terms under the amended SFA are substantially unchanged to those under the original facility, however, as the 
discounted  present  value  of  the  cash  flows  under  the  amended  SFA  are  greater  than  10%  different  to  the  discounted 
present value of the remaining cash flows under the original facility, the amended SFA is treated as an extinguishment of 
the old facility and the recognition of a new financial liability under AASB 139.  As a result, the remaining amendment fee 
of  $9.2m  that  was  being  carried  on  the  balance  sheet  on  1  July  2015  under  the  original  facility  was  amortised  to  the 
Statement of Comprehensive Income in full during the year ended 30 June 2016.  The amendment fee of $4.2m paid in 
relation  to  the  amended  SFA  is currently  on  the  balance  sheet  and  being  amortised  to  the  income  statement  over  the 
earliest maturity date of the facility. 

Under  the  amended  SFA,  the  Company  is  also  required  to  pay  a  deferred  fee  to  the  lenders  in  the  form  of  cash  or 
warrants,  at  the  irrevocable  election  of  the  lenders.  The  costs  associated  with  this  deferred  restructure  fee  totalling 
$17.8m  have  been  treated  as  transaction  costs  relating  to  the  underlying  borrowing  and  are  being  amortised  to  the 
income statement over the term of the facility. Refer to note 5.6.5 for further details on how this deferred fee has been 
accounted for. 

The  Group  has  drawings  of  $765.6m  (30  June  2015:  $710.9m)  under  the  SFA,  against  limits  of  $765.6m  at  30  June 
2016.    The  Group  has  cash  on  hand  of  $82.5m  (30  June  2015:  $97.0m),  other  borrowings  of  $8.5m  (30  June  2015: 
$9.4m), offset by deferred debt raising costs of $9.6m (30 June 2015: $9.2m) resulting in net debt of $682.3m (30 June 
2015: $614.1m) and available liquidity of $88.3m (30 June 2015: $253.5m).  The Group’s net debt position has increased 
since 30 June 2015 by $68.2m, reflecting underlying cash requirements in the business. 

The bills of exchange and bank guarantee facility/letter of credit have been used to fund business acquisitions, to meet 
the day to day working capital requirements and for general corporate purposes. They are secured by a fixed and floating 
charge over the assets of the Group. 

As at 30 June 2016 the Group remains in compliance with all its undertakings under the SFA.   

The Directors are of the view that the Group will continue to comply with the obligations under the SFA.  The Group has 
further initiated a comprehensive review including an assessment of revised financial forecasts, and the implementation 
of  performance  improvement  programmes  with  the  aim  of  improving  the  profitability  of  the  business  and  reducing  the 
level of drawn debt. 

5.2.3  Summary of Borrowing Arrangements 

At reporting date, the following banking facilities had been executed and were available. 

Total banking facilities 
Bank overdrafts 
Bills of exchange 
Other sundry facilities 

Total credit facilities 

Facilities utilised 

Current 

Bills of exchange 

Finance lease liability 

Non-current 

Bills of exchange 
Debt raising costs under the SFA facility(1) 
Finance lease liability 

2016 

$’000 

5,799 
765,893 
10,000 

781,692 

280 

3,362 

3,642 

765,613 

(9,567) 

5,092 

761,138 

2015 

$’000 

 7,053 
859,688 
12,736 

879,477 

447 

3,306 

3,753 

710,477 
(9,246) 

6,123 
707,354 

(1)  Comprises  the  unamortised  value  of  borrowing  costs  on  establishment  of  $3.7m  (30  June  2015:  $9.2m)  and  refinance  of  net  debt 
facilities  of  $5.9m.    These  costs  are  deferred  on  the  balance  sheet  and  amortised  to  the  Statement  of  Comprehensive  Income  (in 
Finance Costs) over the earliest maturity date of the facility. 

A  portion  of  the  bills  of  exchange  is  the  subject  of  interest  rate  swaps  to  hedge  the  risk  of  an  adverse  interest  rate 
movement. Refer to Note 5.4 for more details. 

Bank  overdraft  facilities  are  arranged  with  Westpac  Banking  Corporation  and  Royal  Bank  of  Scotland  (National 
Westminster  Bank)  with  the  general  terms  and  conditions  being  set  and  agreed  to  annually.  The  current  facilities  are 
$4.0m and £1.0m respectively (30 June 2015:  $5.0m and £1.0m). Interest rates on the bank overdrafts are charged at 
variable rates plus an agreed margin, subject to adjustment. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 67 

76  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

5.3   Leasing  

5.3.1  Accounting Policies 

The determination of whether an arrangement is or contains a lease is based on the substance of the arrangement at the 
inception of the lease and requires an assessment of whether the fulfilment of the arrangement is dependent on the use 
of  a  specific  asset  or  assets  and  the  arrangement  conveys  a  right  to  use  the  asset,  even  if  the  right  is  not  explicitly 
specified in the arrangement.  The lease is classified at the inception date as a finance lease or an operating lease. 

Finance Leases 

A  lease  that  transfers  substantially  all  of  the  risks  and  rewards  incidental  to  ownership  to  the  Group  is  classified  as  a 
finance lease. 

Finance leases are capitalised at the commencement of the lease, the inception date fair value of the leased property or, 
if lower, the present value of the minimum lease payments. Lease payments are apportioned between finance charges 
and reduction of the lease liability so as to achieve a constant rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability. 
Finance  charges  are  recognised  as  finance  costs  in  the  statement  of  profit  or  loss  and  other  comprehensive  income. 
Leased assets are  depreciated on a straight line  basis over their estimated useful lives where it is likely the Group will 
obtain ownership of the asset, or if not, over the shorter of the estimated useful life of the asset and the term of the lease. 

The Group leases a certain number of its fixed assets under finance leases. The lease terms range from 3 to 10 years 
(30 June 2015: 3 to 10 years). The Group has options to purchase the equipment for a nominal amount at the end of the 
lease terms. The Group’s obligations under finance leases are secured by the lessors’ title to the leased assets. Interest 
rates underlying all obligations under finance leases are fixed at respective contract rates ranging from 3.96% to 9.25% 
(30 June 2015: 3.2% to 9.25%) per annum. 

Future minimum rentals payable under finance leases as at 30 June are, as follows: 

2016 
$’000 

Present 
value of 
payments 

Minimum 
payments  Interest 

Minimum  
payments 

Interest 

3,808 

5,536 
- 

9,344 

(446) 

(444) 
- 

(890) 

3,362 

5,092 
- 

3,784 

6,778 
- 

(478) 

(655) 
- 

8,454 

10,562 

(1,133) 

2015 
$’000 

Present 
value of 
payments 

3,306 

6,123 
- 

9,429 

Within one year 

One year or later and not later than five years 
Greater than five years 

Operating Leases 

An  operating  lease  is  a  lease  other  than  a  finance  lease.  Operating  lease  payments  are  recognised  as  an  operating 
expense in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income on a straight-line basis over the lease term. 
Lease incentives under operating leases are recognised as a liability and amortised on a straight-line basis over the life 
of the lease. 

Commitments  and  contingencies  are  disclosed  net  of  the  amount  of  GST/VAT  recoverable  from,  or  payable  to,  the 
relevant taxation authority. 

Future minimum rentals payable under non-cancellable operating leases as at 30 June are, as follows: 

Within one year 
One year or later and not later than five years 
Greater than five years 

5.4 

Financial Risk Management 

5.4.1  Accounting Policies 

2016 
$’000 

33,731 
80,470 
52,632 

2015 
$’000 

31,223 
76,894 
65,007 

166,833 

173,124 

The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise cash and cash equivalents, loans and receivables, trade payables 
and loans. The classification of financial instruments depends on the purpose for which the instruments were acquired. 
Management determines the classification of its financial instruments at initial recognition. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 68 

Slater and Gordon Limited  77

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

5.4 

Financial Risk Management (continued) 

5.4.1  Accounting Policies (continued) 

Financial Assets 

Loans and receivables are non-interest bearing, non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that 
are  not  quoted  in  an  active  market.  The  loans  are  initially  recognised  based  on  fair  value  plus  directly  attributable 
transactions costs and are subsequently stated at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method.  

Financial assets are tested for impairment at each financial year end to establish whether there is any objective evidence 
of impairment.  

For loans and receivables carried at amortised cost, impairment loss is measured as the difference between the asset’s 
carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows (excluding future credit losses that have not been 
incurred) discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. The amount of the loss reduces the carrying 
amount  of  the  asset  and  is  recognised  in  profit  or  loss.  The  impairment  loss  is  reversed  through  profit  or  loss  if  the 
amount of the impairment loss decreases in a subsequent period and the decrease can be related objectively to an event 
occurring after the impairment was recognised.  

Non-Derivative Financial Liabilities 

Non-derivative financial liabilities include trade payables, other creditors and loans from third parties including loans from 
or other amounts due to director-related entities.  

Non-derivative  financial  liabilities  are  recognised  at  amortised  cost,  comprising  original  debt,  net  of  directly  attributable 
transaction costs less principal payments and amortisation using the effective interest rate method. 

Non-interest bearing financial liabilities for deferred cash consideration on the acquisition of acquired firms is measured 
at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. The implied interest expense is recognised in profit or loss. 

Derivative Financial Instruments 

The Group designates certain derivatives as either:  

•  hedges of fair value of recognised assets or liabilities or a firm commitment (fair value hedges); or 

•  Hedges of highly probable forecast transactions (cash flow hedges). 

The  Group  currently  has  cash  flow  hedges  only,  relating  to  interest  rate  risk  management.  At  the  inception  of  the 
transaction  the  relationship  between  hedging  instruments  and  hedged  items,  as  well  as  the  Group’s  risk  management 
objective  and  strategy  for  undertaking  various  hedge  transactions  are  documented.  It  is  the  Group’s  policy  to  hedge  a 
portion of its exposure in order to minimise the impact of an adverse change in interest rates that the Group is subject to. 

Assessments,  both  at  hedge  inception  and  on  an  ongoing  basis,  of  whether  the  derivatives  that  are  used  in  hedging 
transactions have been and will continue to be highly effective in offsetting changes in cash flow hedged items, are also 
documented. 

Cash Flow Hedge 

The  effective portion  of changes in the fair value of  derivatives that are designated and qualify  as cash flow hedges is 
recognised in other comprehensive income in the hedge reserve which forms part of equity. The gain or loss relating to 
the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive 
income. 

Amounts accumulated in the hedge reserve in equity are transferred to profit or loss in the periods when the hedged item 
will affect profit or loss. 

5.4.2 

Interest Rate Risk 

The Group's exposure to interest rate risk and the effective interest rates of non-derivative financial assets and financial 
liabilities both recognised and unrecognised at the end of the reporting period are as follows: 

Variable interest rate 

Fixed interest rate 

2016  
$’000 

2015 
$’000 

2016  
$’000 

2015 
$’000 

Total 

2016  
$’000 

2015 
$’000 

82,494 

82,494 

96,985 

96,985 

7,490 
- 
675,913 

683,403 

10,985 
- 
614,610 

625,595 

- 

- 

- 
8,454 
89,980 

98,434 

- 

- 

82,494 

82,494 

96,985 

96,985 

- 
9,429 
96,314 

105,743 

7,490 
8,454 
765,893 
781,837 

10,985 
9,429 
710,924 
731,338 

Page 69 

Financial assets 
Cash 

Total financial assets 

Financial liabilities 
Other current liabilities 
Finance lease liability 
Bills of exchange  

Total financial liabilities 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

78  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

5.4.2 

Interest Rate Risk (continued) 

Interest rate swap transactions are entered into by the Group to exchange variable interest payment obligations to fixed, 
to protect long-term borrowings from the risk of increasing interest rates. The Group uses swap contracts to maintain a 
designated proportion of fixed to floating debt. 

The notional principal amounts of the swap contracts approximate 12% (30 June 2015: 14%) of the Group’s outstanding 
borrowings  on  the  SFA  at  30  June  2016.  The  net  interest  payments  or  receipt  settlements  of  the  swap  contracts  are 
matched to the maturity of the cash advance they are hedging. The net settlement amounts are brought to account as an 
adjustment to interest expense. At the end of the reporting period, the details of outstanding contracts, all of which are to 
receive floating/pay-fixed interest rate swaps, are as follows: 

Maturity of notional amounts 

       Effective average fixed interest 
rate payable 

Notional principal value 

0 to 2 years 
2 to 5 years 

2016 

2.06% 
2.47% 

2015 

2.23% 
2.27% 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 

27,992                35,534  
61,988                60,780  

89,980 

96,314 

Interest rate swaps are measured at fair value with gains and losses taken to the cash flow hedge reserve until such time 
as  the  profit  or  loss  associated  with  the  hedged  risk  is  recognised  in  the  consolidated  statement  of  comprehensive 
income.  

Interest Rate Sensitivity 

If interest rates were to increase/decrease by 100 basis points from rates used to determine fair values as at the end of 
the  reporting  period,  assuming  all  other  variables  that  might  impact  on  fair  value  remain  constant,  then  the  impact  on 
profit for the year and equity would be as follows: 

+/- 100 basis points: 
Impact on profit after tax 
Impact on equity 

2016 
$’000 

- 
2,121 

2015 
$’000 

- 
3,098 

As  borrowings are measured at amortised  cost  and  not  fair  value, any movement in interest rates does  not impact the 
carrying value of those borrowings but would impact their related interest charges. 

5.4.3  Foreign Exchange Risk 

Foreign currency risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of 
changes  in  foreign  exchange  rates.  The  Group’s  exposure  to  foreign  currency  risk  relates  primarily  to  the  Group’s 
operating  activities  (when  revenue  or  expense  is  denominated  in  a  different  currency  from  the  Group’s  presentation 
currency), and the Group’s net investments in foreign subsidiaries (“translational risk”). 

Translational  risk  relating  to  the  acquisition  of  United  Kingdom  subsidiaries  is  partially  hedged  on  an  economic  basis 
through borrowings of those United Kingdom subsidiaries also denominated in GBP, resulting in an overall reduction in 
the net assets that are translated. The remaining translation exposure is not hedged.  

The Group has no significant exposures to currency risk other than the transactional and translational foreign currency 
exposures in relation to its UK subsidiaries.  Any impacts on the balances relating to Slater and Gordon subsidiaries in 
the UK as a result of movements in the foreign exchange rate are recorded in other comprehensive income in the foreign 
currency translation reserve which forms part of equity. Refer to Note 1.5. 

The Group has no other significant exposures to foreign exchange risk. 

5.4.4  Credit Risk  

Credit risk arises from the financial assets of the Group. The main exposure to credit risk in the Group is represented by 
receivables (debtors and disbursements) owing to the Group. The Group’s exposure to credit risk arises from potential 
default of the counterparty, with a maximum exposure equal to the carrying amount of those assets as disclosed in the 
statement of financial position and notes to the financial statements. 

The  Group  held  cash  and  cash  equivalents  of  $82.5m  at  30  June  2016  (30  June  2015:  $97.0m).  The  credit  risk 
associated  with  cash  and  cash  equivalents  is  considered  as  minimal  as  the  cash  and  cash  equivalents  are  held  with 
reputable financial institutions in Australia and the UK.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 70 

Slater and Gordon Limited  79

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

5.4.4  Credit Risk (continued) 

Credit Risk – Slater Gordon Solutions (Motor Services) 

Debts are almost exclusively due from insurance companies.  The capitalisation of insurers is regulated by the Financial 
Conduct Authority in the UK. The insurance industry operates a policyholders’ protection scheme to alleviate the impact 
of the failure of an insurance company. 

Credit  risk  is  therefore  spread  across  major  UK  based  motor  insurers  in  proportion  to  their  respective  share  of  the 
market. No credit insurance is taken out given the regulated nature of these entities. 

No  interest  is  charged  on  the  receivables  balances,  however  late  penalty  payments  become  payable  at  certain  dates 
under  the  Association  of  British  Insurers’  General  Terms  of  Agreement.  SGS  does  not  hold  any  collateral  over  these 
balances nor has the legal right of offset with any amounts owed by SGS to the receivables counterparty. 

Receivables 

There is also credit risk associated with unrendered disbursements and trade receivables. Once client matters are billed, 
a  significant  portion  of  receivables  related  to  the  personal  injuries  business  are  considered  low  risk.  This  is  because 
these receivables are collected directly from settlements paid by insurers into trust funds held on behalf of the Group’s 
clients.    For  the  non-personal  injury  law  business,  the  Group  is  exposed  to  the  credit  risk  associated  with  the  client’s 
ability  to  meet  their  obligations  under  the  fee  and  retainer  agreement.  The  Group  minimises  the  concentration  of  this 
credit risk by undertaking transactions with a large number of clients.   

Management of Credit Risk 

The Group actively manages its credit risk by:  

•  assessing the capability of a client to meet its obligations under the fee and retainer agreement; 

•  periodically reviewing the reasons for bad debt write-offs in order to improve the future decision making process; 

•  maintaining an adequate provision against the future recovery of debtors and disbursements; 

• 

including  in  practitioner’s  Key  Performance  Indicators  (“KPI’s”)  measurements  in  respect  of  debtor  levels,  recovery 
and investment in disbursements; 

•  providing ongoing training to staff in the management of their personal and practice group debtor portfolios; and 

•  where  necessary,  pursuing  the  recovery  of  debts  owed  to  the  Group  through  external  mercantile  agents  and  the 

courts. 

Due to the nature of the “No Win No Fee” arrangements applicable to the majority of the legal matters managed by the 
Group  an  increase  in  the  required  processing  time  between  initiation  and  settlement  and  an  increase  in  the  ageing  of 
receivables, particularly disbursements, does not always increase the associated credit risk. 

Management performs periodic assessment of the recoverability of receivables, and provisions are calculated based on 
historical write-offs of the receivables as well as any known circumstances relating to the matters in progress. 

5.4.5  Liquidity Risk 

The  Group’s  objective  is  to  maintain  a  balance  between  the  continuity  of  funding  and  flexibility  through  the  use  of 
operating cash flows and committed available credit facilities. The Group actively reviews its funding position to ensure 
the available facilities are adequate to meet its current and anticipated needs. 

The Group manages liquidity risk by monitoring forecast cash flows and ensuring that adequate borrowing facilities are 
maintained.  Refer  to  the  statement  of  cash  flows  and  Note  3.3  Cash  Flow  Information,  for  further  information  on  the 
historical  cash  flows.  Further  information  in  relation  to  bank  facilities  available  and  utilised  are  outlined  in  Note  5.2 
Financing arrangements. 

KPIs are set for practitioners relating to budgeted fee events, which are closely monitored by senior management. 

Maturity Analysis 

The table below represents the  estimated and  undiscounted  contractual settlement terms for financial instruments and 
management’s expectation for settlement of undiscounted maturities. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 71 

80  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

5.4.5  Liquidity Risk (continued) 

2016 
Non-derivative financial liabilities 
Payables 
Borrowings 
Other current liabilities 

Financial liability maturities 

2015 (restated) 

Non-derivative financial liabilities 
Payables 
Borrowings 
Other current liabilities 

Financial liability maturities 

< 12 Months 
$’000 

1-5 years 
$’000 

Total contractual 
cash flows 
$’000 

463,570 
43,736 
7,490 

514,796 

612,670 
19,034 
10,985 

642,689 

510 
841,326 
- 
841,836 

3,121 
768,478 
- 
771,599 

Carrying 
amount 
$’000 

464,080 
764,780 
7,490 

1,236,350 

464,080 
885,062 
7,490 
1,356,632 

615,791 
787,512 
10,985 

615,791 
711,107 
10,985 

1,414,288 

1,337,883 

Refer to Note 5.4.2 for the maturity analysis of interest rate swaps.  

5.4.6  Fair Value Risk   

The fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities not measured at fair value approximates their carrying amounts 
as disclosed in the statement of financial position and notes to the financial statements except as set out in Note 4.7.2.  

The  Group  measures  its  interest  rate  swaps  at  fair  value.  These  fair  values  are  based  on  level  2  fair  value 
measurements, as defined in the fair value hierarchy in AASB 13 Fair Value Measurement with reference to market data 
which can be used to estimate future cash flows and discount them to present value. Management’s aim is to use and 
source this data consistently from period to period. 

5.5 

Contributed Equity 

Ordinary shares fully paid 
VCR Shares 

2016 
Shares 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
Shares 

2015 
$’000 

352,377,933 
- 

1,116,573 
(525) 

350,719,894 
833,334 

1,097,928 
417 

Balance at the end of the year 

352,377,933 

1,116,048 

351,553,228 

1,098,345 

Movement in Ordinary Share Capital 

350,719,894 
Balance at the beginning of the year                                                    

1,097,928 

204,338,625 

214,514 

Issued during the year  
•  Consideration for acquisitions 
•  Conversion of vested VCR shares 
•  Dividend Reinvestment Plan 
•  Equity Incentive Plan 
•  Shares issued through Entitlement Offer* 
•  Transfer from share-based payment reserve 
•  Reversal of capital raising costs, net of tax 
Balance at the end of the year 

- 

- 

4,873,700 

728,334 
786,949 
142,756 
- 
- 
- 
352,377,933 

1,399 
2,270 
401 
- 
11,808 
2,767 
1,116,573 

1,275,333 
257,719 
151,668 
139,822,849 
- 
- 
350,719,894 

2,679 

2,397 
1,696 
759 
890,939 
6,199 
(21,255) 
1,097,928 

*The  Group made  two  Entitlement Offers  during the previous  year to  eligible shareholders  to raise finance  for the acquisition  of SGS 
being the Institutional Entitlement Offer and a Retail Entitlement offer. Under the Entitlement Offers, eligible shareholders were invited to 
subscribe for two ordinary shares for every three existing ordinary shares held at the record date per the ASX announcement. Each new 
share ranks equally with the existing shares.  

Ordinary Shares 

Ordinary shares participate in dividends and the proceeds on winding up of the Company in proportion to the number of 
shares held. At shareholders meetings each ordinary share is entitled to one vote when a poll is called, otherwise each 
shareholder has one vote on a show of hands. 

During 2016, the company paid a dividend of $19,330,000 (30 June 2015: $17,620,000). 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 72 

Slater and Gordon Limited  81

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

5.5 

Contributed Equity (continued) 

VCR Shares 

All VCR shares have vested (728,334 VCR shares) or been redeemed (105,000 VCR shares) in the current year.  As at 
30 June  2016 there were nil  VCR shares  on issue (30  June  2015:  833,334 VCR shares). Please  refer  to Note 5.6 for 
discussion on the rights attached to VCR shares. 

5.6 

Share-Based Payment Arrangements  

5.6.1  Accounting Policies 

Equity-settled share-based payments to employees and others providing similar services are measured at the fair value 
of the equity instruments at the grant date. 

The consolidated entity operates share-based payment employee share and option schemes. The fair value of the equity 
to which employees become entitled is measured at grant date and recognised as an expense over the vesting period, 
with  a  corresponding  increase  to  an  equity  account.  In  respect  of  share-based  payments  that  are  dependent  on  the 
satisfaction of performance conditions, the number of shares and options expected to vest is reviewed and adjusted  at 
each reporting date. The amount recognised for services received as consideration for these equity instruments granted 
is adjusted to reflect the best estimate of the number of equity instruments that eventually vest. 

Equity-settled share-based payment transactions with parties other than employees are measured at the fair value of the 
goods or services received, except where that fair value cannot be estimated reliably, in which case they are measured 
at the fair value of the equity instruments granted, measured at the date the entity obtains the goods or the counterparty 
renders the service. 

5.6.2  Employee Equity Incentive Plan (“EIP”)  

For  cash-settled  share-based  payment  transactions,  the  liability  needs  to  be  remeasured  at  the  end  of  each  reporting 
period  up  to  the  date  of  settlement,  with  any  changes  in  fair  value  recognised  in  the  profit  or  loss.  This  requires  a 
reassessment of the estimates used at the end of each reporting period. 

The Group introduced a broad based equity incentive plan which was approved by the Shareholders at the 2014 Annual 
General Meeting (“AGM”). 

(i). 

Exempt Share Save Scheme (“SSS”) 

In  2015  the  Group  introduced  an  offer  for  Exempt  Shares  in  the  Equity  Incentive  Plan.  The  Plan  gives  the  Group’s 
employees  the  opportunity  to  acquire  shares  in  the  Company.  Each  year,  participating  employees  can  make 
contributions from their pre-tax salary to acquire $500 worth of shares. Such employee contributions are matched by the 
Group  with  an  additional $500  worth of  shares being  acquired for each  participating  employee. All employees who are 
Australian tax residents with at least 6 months service are entitled to participate in this Plan. Shares acquired under this 
Plan are subject to a holding period of 3 years. In the year ended 30 June 2016, 142,756 shares were issued under this 
scheme (30 June 2015: 65,688 shares). 

(ii). 

Share Incentive Plan (“SIP”) 

The plan also incorporates a tax-approved scheme to employees in the UK. The Plan gives the Group’s employees the 
opportunity  to  acquire  shares  in  the  Company.  Employees  can  make  contributions  from  their  pre-tax  salary  to  acquire 
£375 (max) worth of shares. Such employee contributions are matched by the Group with a free share for every share 
purchased  by  the  employee.  All  employees  of  the  Group  in  the  UK  with  at  least  6  months  service  are  entitled  to 
participate in this Plan. Shares acquired under this plan are held in trust by MM&K Share Plan Trustee Ltd for a period of 
5  years  from  the  date  of  acquisition.  There  was  no  issue  of  shares  under  this  plan  in  the  current  year  ended  30  June 
2016 (30 June 2015: 85,980 shares). 

(iii).  Executive Equity Incentive Scheme (“EEIS”)  

The plan introduces an ownership-based compensation scheme for executives and senior employees.  

Performance rights are granted for no consideration. Under the scheme each performance right carries an entitlement to 
one  fully  paid  ordinary  share  in  the  Company  subject  to  satisfaction  of  performance  hurdles  and/or  continued 
employment  at an  exercise price of nil. These  executives and senior employees are not entitled to vote  or receive any 
dividends  or  attend  the  meeting  of  the  shareholders  during  the  vesting  period.  Performance  rights  may  not  be 
transferred,  disposed  or  pledged  as  security.  If  the  executive  ceases  to  be  employed  by  the  Group  within  the  vesting 
period, the rights will be forfeited, except in limited circumstances that are approved by the Board.  

The performance hurdles are based on the following: 

•  Total  Shareholder  Return  (“TSR”)  Outperformance  Hurdle  –  This  performance  hurdle  is  based  on  the  Company’s 
TSR  against  the  TSR  of  the  constituent  companies  within  the  S&P/ASX200  (30  June  2015:S&P/ASX  300)  index 
(excluding resources) over the Measurement Period.  

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 73 

82  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

5.6.2  Employee Equity Incentive Plan (“EIP”) (continued)  

•  Compound Annual Growth Rate in Earnings Per Share (“CAGR EPS”) Hurdle – This performance hurdle is based on 

the Company’s Compound Annual Growth Rate in Earnings Per Share over the Measurement Period. 

•  Compound Annual Growth Rate in Regional EBITDA (“CAGR EBITDA”) Hurdle – This performance hurdle is based 

on the designated Region’s Compound Annual Growth Rate in EBITDA over the Measurement Period.  

Any performance rights not vested at the end of the performance period are forfeited. 

FY16 EEIS Offer 

An offer for 547,128 rights was made to Executives in November 2015, and was accepted by those invited to participate. 
The granting of the performance rights was, however, placed on hold and the plan for FY16 was subsequently cancelled.  
Under AASB 2, cancellation of performance rights results in an acceleration of vesting and therefore the full fair value of 
the performance rights of $63,412 was recognised as a share based payment expense in profit or loss in the year ended 
30 June 2016.   

FY15 EEIS Offer and Grant 

In  late  2014,  an  offer  for  performance  rights  was  made  and  accepted  by  Executives  invited  to  participate,  resulting  in 
496,000 rights being granted to Executives. 

The performance conditions applying to the FY15 grant were as follows: 

CAGR EPS Hurdle 
(Group Directors only) 

CAGR EPS Hurdle  

TSR Outperformance 
Hurdle 

CAGR EBITDA 

Performance 

< 10% 

10% to 15% 

% of 
equity 
to vest 

0% 
50% to 
100% 
pro-rata 

Performance 

< 7% 

7% to 10% 

% of 
equity to 
vest 

0% 
50% to 
100% pro-
rata 

> 15% 

100% 

> 10% 

100% 

Performance 
< 50th 
percentile 

50th to 75th 
percentile 
> 75th 
percentile 

% of 
equity to 
vest 

0% 
50% to 
100% 
pro-rata 

Performance 

< 15% 

15% to 20% 

% of 
equity to 
vest 

0% 
50% to 
100% 
pro-rata 

100% 

> 20% 

100% 

The fair value of services received in return for the performance rights granted is calculated by reference to the average 
of volume weighted average price of ordinary shares on each of 5, 10, 15 and 20 days immediately preceding the grant 
date and is measured at grant date. The weighted average fair values at grant date are determined using a fair valuation 
model which reflects the fact that vesting of the shares is dependent on meeting performance criteria based on TSR. The 
vesting of the shares is also subject to non-market conditions but these are not taken into account in the grant date fair 
value measurement of the services received. The assessed fair value of performance rights granted under this scheme 
as remuneration is allocated equally over the period from grant date to vesting date. 

The key terms and conditions related to the performance rights granted under this plan are as follows: 

Grant date/employee 
entitled 

Group Executive Directors 
and Non-Directors in 
Australia (31 October 2014) 
Group Executives in the UK 
(12 December 2014) 
Regional Executives in 
Australia (31 October 2014) 

Regional Executives in the 
UK (12 December 2014) 

Performance 
rights 
granted 
124,000 

Fair value of 
rights at 
Grant date 
2.4643 

44,000 

2.4799 

176,000 

6.1608 

152,000 

6.1997 

Vesting conditions* 

50% subject to TSR 
Outperformance hurdle and 50% 
subject to CAGR EPS hurdle 
Same as above 

50% subject to CAGR EBITDA 
hurdle and 50% subject to 
CAGR EPS hurdle 
Same as above 

Contractual life 
of performance 
rights 
3 years 

3 years 

3 years 

3 years 

* All performance rights include 3 years’ service condition from grant date.    

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 74 

Slater and Gordon Limited  83

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

5.6.2  Employee Equity Incentive Plan (“EIP”) (continued) 

Total number of rights granted under both the FY15 and FY16 plan: 

Grant date 

Balance at 
beginning 
of the year 

31 October 2014 
12 December 2014 
18 December 2015 

300,000 
196,000 
- 

Granted 
during the 
year 

- 
- 
547,128 (1) 

Vested 
during 
the 
year 
- 
- 
- 

Forfeited 
during 
the year 

Cancelled 
during 
the year 

Balance at 
end of the 
year 

Exercisable 
at end of 
the year 

(16,000) 
(68,000) 
- 

- 
- 
(547,128) 

284,000 
128,000 
- 

- 
- 
- 

(1)  Performance rights were offered, accepted but not granted as the plan was subsequently cancelled.  

Share-based payment expenses recognised in profit or loss are disclosed in Note 3.2.  

5.6.3  Employee Ownership Plan (“EOP”) 

The EOP has been replaced  by the EIP (refer  5.6.2 above)  and  is  therefore currently in  run-off.   No  new  shares  have 
been issued under the EOP during the year ended 30 June 2016. 

The EOP provided for the issue of VCR shares to participants in a number of tranches and for the Company to make a 
full recourse loan to participants equal to the total amount that is to be subscribed. 

The loan is secured by the VCR shares or the converted VCR shares. The offer made by the Board specified the date by 
which the loan must be repaid.  

Vesting, Redemptions and Conversion 

Vesting conditions were set by the Board and related to the performance of the participant and the performance of the 
Company. Cessation of employment with the Group resulted in the forfeiture of that participant’s VCR shares. The Board 
has the power to specify other forfeiture events.  

Where  vesting  conditions  were  not  met  or  a  forfeiture  event  occurred,  the  Company  had  the  power  to  redeem  the 
relevant tranche (or tranches) of VCR shares for an  amount equal to the relevant proportion of the subscribed  amount 
(this amount may be offset against any loan made to the participant).   

If  all  vesting  conditions  were  satisfied,  and  no  forfeiture  event  had  occurred,  each  tranche  of  VCR  shares  vested,  and 
then automatically converted to ordinary shares on a one for one basis, on the relevant vesting date. 

All  remaining  VCR  shares  were  either  redeemed  or  vested  and  converted  to  ordinary  shares  during  the  current  year, 
resulting in nil VCR shares as at 30 June 2016. 

After Conversion 

After conversion the shares rank in all respects pari passu with all other shares on issue. However those shares will be 
subject to disposal restrictions.  

If the participant ceases employment with the Group, their converted VCR shares can be forfeited or bought back by the 
Company and set off against any outstanding loan. The participant may be deemed liable for any shortfall between the 
value of the shares forfeited or brought back by the Company and the loan amount. 

At  the  cessation  of  the  Buyback  Period,  each  participant  is  required  to  enter  into  a  Binding  Commitment  with  the 
Company in respect of their converted VCR shares. Under the Binding Commitment the participants in the EOP will be 
under the following restrictions: 

They will be required to maintain a minimum level of shareholding for as long as they remain an employee of the Group.  
The minimum holding is calculated based on the: 

• 

• 

lower of 15% of the aggregate number of VCR shares, or 20% of the aggregate value (based on the issue price) of 
VCR shares, issued to that employee which have vested and converted to shares. 

if they cease to be employed by the Group, they may forfeit or be required to dispose of some or all of their shares 
upon  such  termination.  The  ramifications  of  a  departure  from  employment  are  linked  to  the  circumstances 
surrounding that departure. 

Transfer 

VCR  shares  may  not  be  transferred.  During  the  Buyback  Period,  converted  VCR  shares  may  not  be  transferred; 
however,  an  exception  applies  for  a  takeover  or  scheme  of  arrangement  relating  to  the  Company  that  meets  certain 
conditions set out in the EOP. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 75 

84  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

5.6.3  Employee Ownership Plan (“EOP”) (continued) 

Profile of Vesting, Conversion and Redemption of VCR Shares to Ordinary Shares 

The  profile  of  the  conversion  of  VCR  shares  relating  to  the  issued  VCR  shares  in  February  2011,  December  2011, 
December  2012  and  February  2013  into  ordinary  shares  (subject  to  disposal  restrictions)  based  on  the  shares  issued 
under the EOP as at 30 June 2016: 

VCR shares which have (or may) vest as ordinary 
shares 
VCR shares which may convert to ordinary 
shares but are subject to disposal restrictions 

Accounting Recognition 

Vested 
’000 

5,683 

3,719 

1 year or 
less 
’000 

1 to 5 
years 
’000 

More than 
5 years 
’000 

- 

- 

- 

1,964 

- 

- 

Total 
’000 

5,683 

5,683 

The VCR Share loan receivable is initially recognised  at its fair value and is ascertained with reference to the  effective 
interest method under AASB 139 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. The profit or loss impact is taken 
as  the  difference  between  the  expected  repayment  period  and  the  expected  present  value  of  the  loan  amount  at  the 
reporting date and is recognised as interest income. 

The key assumptions used in the present value calculation are:  

Date VCR shares issued 

22 February 2011 

31 December 2011 

Shares issued 
Issue price 
Effective interest rate 

Final repayment date 

1,830,000 
$2.05 
8.5% 
1 July 2014 to 
1 July 2018 (1) 

2,390,000 
$1.79 
8.5% 
1 July 2015 to 
1 July 2018 (1) 

20 December 2012 
and 
25 February 2013 
2,425,000 
$1.95 
8.5% 
1 July 2016 to 
1 July 2018 (1) 

(1)  During the year, the Board extended the final repayment date for each remaining tranche to 30 June 2018. 

The benefit provided to the employee is required to be recognised in the accounts under AASB 2 Share-based Payment.  
The  benefit is assessed as the difference  between the fair value  of the VCR shares at the  issue  date  and  the  present 
value  discounted  over  the  vesting  period.  The  benefit  is  expensed  with  reference  to  the  effective  interest  rate  method 
over the vesting period. The share based payments expense has been disclosed in Note 3.2. 

5.6.4  Share Based Payment Arrangements to Former Owners 

The  Group  has  changed  its  accounting  treatment  of  deferred  consideration  payable  for  the  acquisition  of  legal  service 
practices.  Arrangements  that  include  contingent  consideration  to  vendors  of  the  business  that  are  subject  to  so-called 
“bad  leaver”  provisions  were  previously  considered  as  part  of  the  consideration  paid  or  payable  for  the  business 
combination.  

Included in the terms of a  number of  purchase  agreements entered into  by  the  Group  is  an  arrangement  whereby the 
payment of cash consideration to and/or the retention of share-based consideration by the vendors of acquired entities is 
contingent upon the relevant vendors remaining with the Group for a defined period.  If a vendor ceases to remain with 
the Group for the prescribed period, the vendor may forfeit its entitlement to payment of the cash consideration and/or its 
ability to retain its share-based consideration, at the discretion of the Group. 

These  arrangements  are  treated  as  a  share-based  payment  transaction  with  the  former  owners.  The  transaction  is 
measured at the fair value of the equity instruments granted and then recognised as an expense over the vesting period 
as  agreed  per  each  contract.  The  relevant  expense  is  disclosed  in  the  statement  of  profit  or  loss  and  other 
comprehensive income. 

5.6.5  Share Based Payment Arrangements under the Syndicated Facility Agreement (“SFA”) 

As mentioned in note 5.2.1, in May 2016, the terms of the multicurrency SFA were revised.  Under the revised terms, the 
company is required to pay a deferred restructure fee to its lenders on refinancing or maturity of the debt in the form of 
cash or warrants, at the irrevocable option of the lender.  As reported to the market on  6 June 2016, 58.4% of lenders 
elected  to  be  paid in cash whilst 41.6%  have  elected to  be  paid  in  warrants.   The warrants provide for a placement of 
shares  of  up  to  15%  of  any  uplift  in  the  market  capitalisation  of  the  Company  from  the  effective  date  of  the  SFA 
amendment to such refinancing or maturity. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 76 

Slater and Gordon Limited  85

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

5.6.5  Share Based Payment Arrangements under the Syndicated Facility Agreement (“SFA”) (continued) 

The  deferred  restructure  fee  was  accounted  for  as  a  compound  share-based  payment  within  the  scope  of  AASB  2, 
including a  debt  and  equity component.  The total value  of  the restructure fee was  measured directly,  with reference to 
the fair value  of the debt establishment services, being $17.8m. This was determined  by proxy  as the present value of 
the  cash  settlement  option  which  amounted  to  $20.2m,  therefore  the  initial  liability  was  recognised  at  $17.8m  and  the 
residual  equity  component  was  initially  measured  at  nil.  The  costs  associated  with  this  deferred  restructure  fee  have 
been treated as transaction costs relating to the underlying borrowing and are being amortised to the income statement 
over the term of the facility. Refer note 5.2.2 for more information. 

Partial  settlement  of  the  deferred  restructure  fee  liability  occurred  in  June  2016  when  41.6%  of  the  lenders  elected  to 
take  the  warrant  payment  option.    This  resulted  in  a  reclassification  from  liability  to  share  based  payment  reserve  in 
equity of $7.4m with no gain or loss recognised on reclassification.  Despite not being due until at least 29 May 2018, the 
warrants vested immediately, as there are no conditions attached to the exercise of the warrants.  This equity component 
is  not remeasured  after  vesting  and no  gain  or loss will be  recognised when  the  share  capital is issued on  settlement. 
Upon settlement and issuance of shares, the equity amount will be transferred to contributed capital. 

The remaining cash payment restructure fee is treated as a cash-settled share-based payment and is remeasured to fair 
value at each reporting date up until settlement, with gains and losses recognised in profit or loss. Gains and losses on 
remeasurement of $0.1m are presented within finance costs for the year ended 30 June 2016. The liability recognised for 
the remaining cash component as at 30 June 2016 is $10.5m and is presented included in the net long term borrowings 
amounts as detailed in Note 5.2.3.  

Note 6: Other Notes 

6.1 

Related Party Disclosures 

6.1.1  Equity Interests in Related Parties 

The table below lists the primary operating controlled entities of the Group. Individual controlled entities that are dormant 
have not been listed. All are owned 100% unless noted. 

Country of incorporation 

Australia 
Trilby Misso Lawyers Limited 
Slater & Gordon Lawyers NSW Pty Limited 
Conveyancing Works (Qld) Pty Limited 

United Kingdom 

SGL UK 
Walker Smith Way Limited 
WSW Limited 
Slater & Gordon (UK) 1 Limited 
4 Legal Limited  

SGS 
Quindell Legal Services Limited 
iSaaS Technology Limited 
Compass Costs Consultants Ltd 
Intelligent Claims Management Limited 
Mobile Doctors Group Limited 
Medici Legal Limited 
Mobile Doctors Solutions Limited 
Mobile Doctors Limited 
React & Recover Medical Group Limited 
Recover Healthcare Limited 
React Medical Reporting Limited 
React Medical Management Limited 
Medicalaw Limited 
Abstract Legal Holdings Limited 

Malta 
Overland Limited 
Overland Health Limited 

Schultz Toomey O’Brien Pty Ltd 
All States Legal Co Pty Ltd 
SG NSW Pty Ltd 

4 Legal Solutions Limited  
Slater & Gordon (UK) LLP  
Adroit Financial Planning Limited 

Quindell Business Process Service (UK) Limited 
Accident Advice Helpline Direct Limited  
Legal Facilities & Management Services Limited 
Access to Compensation Limited 
Liberty Protect Limited 
Slater Gordon Solutions Legal Limited 
Quindell ACH Limited 
Crusader Group Holdings Limited 
Equi-Medical Reports Limited 
Equi Rehab Limited 
Crusader Uninsured Loss Recovery Services Limited 
Crusader Connect Limited 
SGS Business Process Services (UK) Limited 

Overland Malta (Trading) Limited 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 77 

86  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

6.1.1  Equity Interests in Related Parties (continued) 

ACH Group Management Limited was disposed of during the period. Overland Legal Limited and Property Home Buyer 
Limited were liquidated during the period. 

6.1.2  Deed of Cross Guarantee    

All Australian segment entities are parties to a deed of cross guarantee under which each company guarantees the debts 
of the others. By entering into the deed, the wholly-owned entities have been relieved from the requirement to prepare a 
financial  report and  directors’ report  under Class Order 98/1418 (as amended) issued  by the Australian  Securities and 
Investments Commission. Please refer to the Slater and Gordon Australia segment in Note 2 for further information. 

6.1.3  Key Management Personnel Compensations  

Compensation by category 
Short-term employment benefits 
Post-employment benefits 
Other long term employment benefits 
Share based payments 
Other benefits 

2016 
$ 

2015 
$ 

4,056,725 
213,254 
60,741 
73,548 
499,331 

3,733,136 
210,386 
54,954 
49,084 
- 

4,903,599 

4,047,560 

6.1.4  Transactions with Other Related Parties  

The shareholdings of related parties and remuneration of KMP are disclosed in the Directors’ Report. 

Outstanding  receivables,  if  any,  between  related  parties  are  included  in  Note  4.2.  Outstanding  payables,  if  any,  are 
included in Note 4.6.  

6.2 

Parent Entity Disclosures 

As  at,  and  throughout,  the  financial  year  ended  30  June  2016  the  parent  entity  of  the  Group  was  Slater  and  Gordon 
Limited.  Investments in subsidiary are accounted for at cost, less any impairment recognised since acquisition. 

Results of parent entity 
(Loss)/profit for the year 
Other comprehensive loss 

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year 

2016 
$’000 

2015 
$’000 
Restated 

(1,133,848) 
(334) 

(1,134,182) 

71,538 
(351) 

71,187 

There  has  been  a  recharge  by  the  parent  entity  of  management  and  associated  services  and  interest  expense  to  the 
subsidiary entities up to 31 May 2016. 

Financial position for the parent entity at year end 
Current assets 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Total equity of the parent company comprising of 
Contributed equity 
Reserves 
Retained profits 
Total Equity 

134,306 

328,910 

412,799 

1,518,650 

91,857 

290,813 

102,520 

270,493 

1,115,993 
34,705 
(1,028,712) 
121,986 

1,098,292 
25,399 
124,466 
1,248,157 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 78 

Slater and Gordon Limited  87

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

6.3 

Auditor’s Remuneration  

The auditor of the Group for the year ended 30 June 2016 is Ernst & Young (30 June 2015: Pitcher Partners). 

Audit Services 
Ernst & Young 

Audit and review of financial reports 

Overseas Ernst & Young firms 

Audit and review of financial reports 
Other regulatory audit services 

Other Auditor 

Audit and review of financial reports 
Other regulatory audit services 

Other Services 
Ernst & Young 

Other – consulting services 

Overseas Ernst & Young firms 

Due diligence investigations 

Other Auditor 

Other – consulting services 
Due diligence investigations 

2016 
$ 

2015 
$ 

700,000 

- 

2,797,090 
57,446 

1,614,080 
- 

218,553 

51,531 
3,824,620 

685,557 
43,472 
2,343,109 

257,000 

- 

- 

1,475,791 

282,033 
16,125 
4,379,778 

- 
177,860 
3,996,760 

6.4 

Accounting Standards issued but not yet effective at 30 June 2016 

At  the date  of  authorisation of the financial statements, the  Standards  and  Interpretations that were issued  but  not yet 
effective,  which  have  not  been  early  adopted  are  listed  below.  A  formal  assessment  of  the  expected  impacts  of  these 
standards and interpretations has not taken place, however, it is not expected that there will be significant changes in the 
Group’s accounting policies. 

Reference 

AASB 9  

Title 

Application date  of 
Standard 

Application date for 
Group 

Financial Instruments 

1 January 2018 

1 July 2018 

AASB  9  is  the  replacement  of  AASB139  Financial  Instruments:  Recognition  and  measurement  and  comprises  three 
parts. The first part introduces new requirements for the classification and measurement of financial assets and liabilities. 
These requirements improve and simplify the approach for classification and measurement of financial assets compared 
with the requirements of AASB 139. 

The main changes are: 

•  Financial assets that are debt instruments will be classified based on (i) the objective of the entity's business model 

for managing the financial assets, and (ii) the characteristics of the contractual cash flows. 

•  Allows an irrevocable election on initial recognition to present gains and losses on investments in equity instruments 
that  are  not  held  for  trading  in  other  comprehensive  income.  Dividends  in  respect  of  these  investments  that  are  a 
return on  investment can  be recognised  in  profit  or loss and there is  no  impairment  or recycling  on  disposal  of the 
instrument. 

• 

Introduces  a  ‘fair  value  through  other  comprehensive  income’  measurement  category  for  particular  simple  debt 
instruments. 

•  Financial assets can be designated and measured at fair value through profit or loss at initial recognition if doing so 
eliminates  or  significantly  reduces  a  measurement  or  recognition  inconsistency  that  would  arise  from  measuring 
assets or liabilities, or recognising the gains and losses on them, on different bases. 

•  Where the fair value option is used for financial liabilities, the change in fair value is to be accounted for as follows: 

o  The change attributable to changes in credit risk are presented in other comprehensive income (OCI) 

o  The remaining change is presented in profit or loss 

If this approach creates or enlarges an accounting mismatch in the profit or loss, the effect of the changes in credit risk 
are also presented in profit or loss. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 79 

88  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

6.4 

Accounting Standards issued but not yet effective at 30 June 2016 (continued) 

The second part of AASB 9 relates to hedge accounting and represents a substantial overhaul of hedge accounting that 
enable entities to better reflect their risk management activities in the financial statements. 

The final part of AASB 9 introduces a new impairment model based on expected credit losses. This model makes use of 
more  forward-looking  information  and  applies  to  all  financial  instruments  and  other  assets  e.g.  contract  assets/work  in 
progress recognised under AASB15 that are subject to impairment requirements of AASB 9. 

Reference 

AASB 2016-3 

Title 

Application date  of 
Standard 

Application date for 
Group 

Amendments to Australian 
Accounting Standards – 
Clarifications to AASB 15 

1 January 2018 

1 July 2018 

AASB 2016-3 Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards – Clarifications to AASB 15 amends AASB 15 to clarify 
the  requirements  on  identifying  performance  obligations,  principal  versus  agent  considerations  and  the  timing  of 
recognising revenue from granting a licence and provides further practical expedients on transition to AASB 15. 

Reference 

AASB 16  

The key features of AASB 16 are as follows: 

Lessee Accounting 

Title 
Leases 

Application date  of 
Standard 

Application date for 
Group 

1 January 2019 

1 July 2019 

•  Lessees are required to recognise assets and liabilities for all leases on balance sheet with a term of more than 12 

months, unless the underlying asset is of low value. 

•  Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially measured on a present value basis. The measurement includes 
non-cancellable  lease  payments  (including  inflation-linked  payments),  and  also  includes  payments  to  be  made  in 
optional  periods  if  the lessee  is reasonably certain to  exercise an  option  to  extend the lease,  or  not  to exercise  an 
option to terminate the lease. 

•  AASB 16 contains disclosure requirements for lessees.  

Lessor Accounting 

•  AASB 16 substantially carries forward the lessor accounting requirements in the current  lease standard AASB  117. 
Accordingly, a lessor continues to classify its leases as operating leases or finance leases, and to account for those 
two types of leases differently. 

•  AASB 16 also requires enhanced disclosures to be provided by lessors that will improve information disclosed about 

a lessor’s risk exposure, particularly to residual value risk. 

Note 7: Unrecognised Items 

7.1  Guarantees 

The Group has entered into lease rental guarantees and performance guarantees with a face value of $12.5m (30 June 
2015: $28.6m). 

7.2 

Contingent Consideration 

The  Group  may  be  required  to  pay  contingent  consideration  in  relation  to  acquisitions  that  have  been  undertaken. 
Further details are included in Notes 4.7 and 9. 

7.3  Other Commitments and Contingencies 

The  Group  has  agreements  with  third  party  disbursement  funders,  ASK  Funding  Limited  and  Equal  Access  Funding 
Proprietary Limited (‘the existing funders”), who fund disbursements in respect of individual matters and are reimbursed 
out  of  any  settlement  proceeds  on  the  matter.  The  Group  has  provided  a  financial  guarantee  to  the  funders  for  the 
repayment of clients’ obligations. 

During  the  prior  financial  year,  the  Group  ended  its  arrangement  with  ASK  Funding  and  settled  all  disbursements 
previously funded by ASK Funding and recognised them as part of the receivables balance at 30 June 2015. The total 
amount funded by the funders to the Group’s clients at 30 June 2016 is $19.0m (30 June 2015: $18.9m). The maximum 
exposure of the Group at 30 June 2016 is $19.0m (30 June 2015: $18.9m) if the disbursements on client matters are not 
recovered from any other party. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 80 

Slater and Gordon Limited  89

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

Note 8:  Subsequent Events 

Subsequent to the end of the financial year there have been no matters or circumstances that have significantly affected, 
or may significantly affect, the results reported in the financial statements.  

Note 9:  Business Combinations  

9.1 

Accounting Policies 

Business combinations are accounted for by applying the acquisition method. The cost of an acquisition is measured as 
the aggregate of the consideration transferred, which is measured at acquisition-date fair value, and the amount of any 
non-controlling  interests  in  the  acquiree.  Deferred consideration  payable is measured at  present  value. Any  contingent 
consideration to be transferred by the acquirer is recognised at the acquisition-date fair value. Contingent consideration 
classified  as  a  liability  that  is  a  financial  instrument  and  within  the  scope  of  AASB  139  is  measured  at  fair  value  with 
changes in fair value recognised in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. For each business 
combination,  the  Group  elects  whether  to  measure  the  non-controlling  interests  in  the  acquiree  at  fair  value  or  the 
proportionate share of the acquiree identifiable net assets. Acquisition related costs are expensed as incurred. 

Goodwill is initially measured at cost (being the excess of the aggregate of the consideration transferred and the amount 
recognised  for  non-controlling  interests)  and  any  previous  interest  held  over  the  net  identifiable  assets  acquired  and 
liabilities assumed. If the fair value of the net assets acquired is in excess of the aggregate consideration transferred, the 
Group  re-assesses  whether  it  has  correctly  identified  all  of  the  assets  acquired  and  all  of  the  liabilities  assumed  and 
reviews the procedures used to measure the amounts recognised at the acquisition date. If the reassessment still results 
in  an  excess  of  the  fair  value  of  net  assets  acquired  over  the  aggregate  consideration  transferred,  then  the  gain  is 
recognised in profit or loss as a gain from bargain purchase. 

In conjunction with the business combination transaction there may be a transfer of assets between controlled entities as 
part of restructuring the acquired business. The parent accounts for such transfers through reallocation of the cost of the 
investments in its statement of financial position.  

Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements 

The fair value of customer relationships acquired in a business combination is determined using the multi-period excess 
earnings  method (“MEEM”) whilst the fair value  of trademarks acquired in  a  business combination is based  on  a  relief 
from royalties approach. These methods require estimates by management of future income streams, applicable royalty 
rates and discount rates 

Provisional  accounting  is  applied  by  the  Group  to  account  for  business  combinations  when  the  initial  accounting  is 
incomplete at the end of the reporting period. An entity has 12 months to finalise its provisional accounting. By its nature 
provisional accounting involves estimates and judgements based on the information available to the Group at the end of 
the  reporting  period,  while  it  continues  to  seek  information  about  facts  and  circumstances  that  existed  as  of  the 
acquisition date.  

9.2 

Current Period Business Combinations 

There were no business combinations during the year ended 30 June 2016. 

9.3 

Prior Period Business Combinations 

9.3.1  Acquisition of business – All States Legal Co Pty Ltd trading as Nowicki Carbone 

On  31  October  2014,  the  Group  acquired  the  business  of  Nowicki  Carbone,  a  personal  injury  law  firm  based  in 
Melbourne, Victoria. 

The strategic rationale for this business acquisition was: 

• 

to further expand the Group’s personal injury law practice; 

•  synergies expected to be achieved as a result of combining the acquired business with the rest of the Group; and 

• 

to reaffirm the Group’s position as the leading law firm brand in the Australian consumer legal services market. 

The initial accounting for this acquisition had  previously  been  provisionally  determined.  The  necessary fair valuation  of 
consideration  and  net  assets  acquired  has  now  been  finalised  and  is  reflected  in  the  amounts  detailed  below.  This 
revaluation  has  resulted  in  an  increase  in  the  work  in  progress  of  $5,805,000  and  additional  provisions  raised  of 
$986,000 resulting in an increase in the gain from bargain purchase of $4,819,000. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 81 

90  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

9.3.1 

Acquisition of business – All States Legal Co Pty Ltd trading as Nowicki Carbone (continued) 

The consideration transferred and the value of the assets and liabilities assumed at the date of acquisition are as follows: 

Consideration 
Cash 
Total consideration  

Net assets acquired 

Assets 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Plant and equipment 
- Intangible assets 
- Deferred taxation 
- Other assets 
Total assets acquired 

Liabilities 
- Bank overdraft 
- Payables 
- Provisions 
- Borrowings 
Total liabilities acquired 

Net assets acquired 

Gain from bargain purchase 

         $’000 
10,000 
10,000 

Fair Value 
$’000 

3,158 
45,014 
993 
57 
770 
  1,323 
        51,315 

(151) 
(3,448) 
   (511) 
 (319) 
  (4,429) 
46,886 
(36,886) 

Acquisition-related costs  for  this acquisition  amounting to  $nil (30 June  2015:  $270,000)  have  been  excluded  from the 
total consideration and have been recognised as an expense in the period, within the ‘costs associated with acquisitions’ 
line item in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. 

9.3.2  Acquisition of Business – Slater Gordon Solutions 

On 29 May 2015 the Group acquired SGS from Quindell Plc. SGS comprised of 52 legal entities incorporated in the UK 
and Malta. A listing of the entities, excluding dormant entities, is shown in Note 6.1.1. 

The principal activities of SGS are: 

(i). 

First notification of loss (“FNOL”) services for various partner organisations, including insurance brokers, insurers, 
motoring  organisations  and  vehicle  manufacturers.    These  services  include  the  facilitation  of  vehicle  retrieval, 
repair and replacement vehicle hire for not at fault drivers; 

(ii). 

Conducting claims on behalf of not at fault parties to road traffic accidents (“RTA”), including car hire, repair and 
personal injury claims; 

(iii).  Conducting  claims  on  behalf  of  individuals  injured  in  the  course  of  employment  or  in  a  public  place  (“EL/PL”).  
One type of employers’ liability claim that SGS is currently conducting are personal injury claims for a large group 
of  people  who  allege  noise  induced  hearing  loss  (“NIHL”)  as  a  consequence  of  employment  and  who  may  be 
entitled to compensation  as  a  result.   It  is expected that these NIHL claims  will  be concluded in the  next  1  to 3 
years; and 

(iv).  Services complementary to these claims processes, including: 

(a). 

A medical reporting service for claimant lawyers; 

(b). 

The assessment, triage and facilitation of rehabilitation services for not at fault parties injured in accidents; 
and 

(c). 

A costing service for lawyers and law firms. 

The strategic rationale for this business acquisition was: 

• 

to become the leading personal injury group in the UK; and 

•  access to a comprehensive platform of businesses, processes and infrastructure that augments the Group’s existing 

UK operation. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 82 

Slater and Gordon Limited  91

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

9.3.2  Acquisition of Business – Slater Gordon Solutions (continued) 

The consideration transferred and the value of the consolidated assets and liabilities assumed at the date of acquisition 
is as follows: 

Consideration 
Cash 
Repayment of cash consideration for SGS acquisition 
Cash paid for liabilities acquired from previous owner 

Net present value of total consideration  

Net assets acquired 

Assets 
- Cash and cash equivalents 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Plant and equipment 
- Intangible assets 
- Current tax assets 
- Deferred tax assets 
- Other assets 

Total assets acquired 

Liabilities 
- Short-term borrowings 
- Current tax liability 
- Payables 
- Provisions 
- Deferred tax liabilities 

Total liabilities acquired 

Net assets acquired 

Goodwill on acquisition 

       $’000 
936,793 
(2,399) 
357,902 
1,292,296 

 Fair Value 
        $’000 

5,129 
266,359 
121,941 
4,890 
50,342 
34,484 
47,768 
7,080 

537,993 

(10) 
(14,080) 
(331,098) 
(7,504) 
(9,304) 

(361,996) 

175,997 

1,116,299 

The  initial  accounting  for  the  acquisition  of  SGS  had  previously  been  provisionally  determined.  The  necessary  fair 
valuation  of  consideration  and  net  assets  acquired  has  now  been  finalised  and  is  reflected  in  the  amounts  detailed 
above. The respective changes to reported provision fair value of net assets acquired are: 

•  $31.4m reduction in the fair value of work in progress; 

•  $93.5m decrease in the fair value of trade and other receivables and other assets; 

• 

Increase in current tax assets by $5.4m; 

•  Reduction of Brand Names totalling $20.9m with an assessed fair value of Nil at acquisition date (Quindell Business 

Processes Services (“QPBS”) and Accident Claims Helpline (“ACH”)); 

• 

Increase in the deferred tax asset by $3.0m to recognise the future tax benefit associated with the revised fair value 
of  WIP  in  accordance  with  AASB  15,  AASB  3  restatements,  and  other  fair  value  adjustments  incorporating  carry 
forward losses; 

•  Reduction in the fair value of trade payables and provisions by $14.4m; and 

•  $4.1m reduction to deferred tax liabilities associated with de-recognition of acquired brands (QPBS & ACH). 

The  resulting  impact  of  the  above  fair  value  adjustment  is  to  increase  the  value  of  Goodwill  on  acquisition  to  $1.116 
billion.  

The  key  item  that  gave  rise  to  the  goodwill  above  is  the  capacity  of  SGS  to  underpin  strategic  growth  of  the  personal 
injuries practice within the UK market. However, during the current year ended 30 June 2016 an impairment expense of 
$814.2m was recognised against this goodwill. Refer to Note 4.1 for further detail. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 83 

92  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

9.3.2  Acquisition of Business – Slater Gordon Solutions (continued) 

Acquisition-related costs for this acquisition amounting to $445,006 (30 June 2015: $20,776,000) have been recognised 
as an expense in the period, within the ‘costs associated with acquisitions’ line item in the statement of profit or loss and 
other comprehensive income. 

It remains impractical for the Group to determine an estimate of the noise-induced hearing loss (“NIHL”) claims asset and 
associated deferred consideration.  

On  5  August  2015,  Quindell  Plc,  the  vendor  of  SGS,  published  qualified  financial  statements  in  which  the  current 
directors and auditors of Quindell Plc explained, inter alia, that relevant information relating to transactions entered into 
by  the  former  directors  that  could  impact  on  the  accounting,  intention,  commercial  purpose  or  value  of  certain 
transactions was not available to them.  

On 5 August 2015 the  Serious  Fraud Office  in the  United  Kingdom advised that it had  opened  a criminal  investigation 
into the business and accounting practices of Quindell Plc.   

The acquisition of SGS was structured as an acquisition of the various entities rather than an acquisition of the common 
stock of Quindell Plc. Moreover, Quindell Plc provided detailed warranties to the Company in relation to the operations of 
the assets comprising SGS.  Those warranties are secured by a Warranty Escrow account holding  £50m until October 
2016.   

The Company is confident that it has no liability as a result of the matters described above. 

In  the  course  of  preparing  these  financial  statements,  the  Directors  have  sought  to  identify,  understand  and  properly 
account for all relevant  prior  transactions  undertaken  by entities within SGS.  Despite  reasonable  inquiries, including  of 
current directors of Quindell Plc, the Directors are unable to identify or rationalise every historic transaction undertaken 
by  the  former  directors  of  the  various  entities  and  have  made  fair  value  adjustments  as  appropriate.  The  Directors 
believe that none of the known transactions relate to the fundamental business activities or economics of SGS and none 
of the known transactions are material in value or effect to the Company. 

9.3.3  Acquisition of other Businesses in the UK  

During the prior year ended 30 June 2015, the Group acquired the following businesses in the UK: 

  Acquisition Date 
  5 September 2014 
  8 May 2015 

Business 
Flint Bishop LLP 
Leo Abse Cohen 

Location 
Derby, UK 
Wales, UK 

Business Type 
Personal Injury Law 
Personal Injury Law and Consumer Legal Services 

The strategic rationale for these business acquisitions was: 

•  diversification of earnings through expansion of geographic coverage; and 

• 

to become a dominant law firm brand in the consumer legal services market in the UK. 

The initial accounting for the acquisitions had previously been provisionally determined.  

The  necessary  fair  valuation  of  consideration  and  net  assets  acquired  has  now  been  finalised  and  is  reflected  in  the 
amounts  detailed  below.  For  Flint  Bishop  LLP  this  revaluation  has  resulted  in  an  increase  in  the  work  in  progress  of 
$1.6m  and increase  in  deferred tax liability of  $0.3m  resulting in  a  decrease of the  goodwill to  nil, and  a resulting  gain 
from bargain purchase of $1.2m. For Leo Abse Cohen this revaluation has resulted in a decrease in the work in progress 
of  $1.5m  and  decrease  in  deferred  tax  liability  of  $0.3m  resulting  in  a  decrease  in  the  gain  from  bargain  purchase  of 
$1.2m. 

The consideration transferred and the value of the consolidated assets and liabilities assumed at the dates of acquisition 
are as follows: 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 84 

Slater and Gordon Limited  93

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

9.3.3  Acquisition of other Businesses in the UK (continued) 

Consideration 
Cash 
Fair value of deferred and contingent consideration (cash) 
Net present value of total consideration  

Net assets acquired 

Assets 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Other assets 
Total assets acquired 

Liabilities 
- Payables 
- Provisions 
- Deferred tax liabilities 
Total liabilities acquired 
Net assets acquired 
Gain from bargain purchase 

       $’000 
13,136 
1,427 
14,563 

 Fair Value 
        $’000 

7,670 
29,356 

850 

37,876 

(4,499) 
(1,140) 
(20) 

(5,659) 

32,217 

(17,654) 

*The acquisition of Flint Bishop LLP resulted in a gain from bargain purchase of  $1,226,000 and the acquisition of Leo 
Abse Cohen resulted in a gain from bargain purchase of $16,428,000. 
Acquisition-related costs for these acquisitions amounting to $28,000 (30 June 2015:  $458,000)  have been recognised 
as an expense in the period, within the ‘costs associated with acquisitions’ line item in the statement of profit or loss and 
other comprehensive income 

9.3.4  Acquisition of Business – Walker Smith Way Limited 

On 30 April 2015, the Group acquired the business of Walker Smith Way Limited, a personal injury and consumer law 
practice operating throughout Northern England and Wales.  

The strategic rationale for this business acquisition is: 

•  diversification of earnings through expansion of geographic coverage; and 

• 

to become a dominant law firm brand in the consumer legal services market in the UK. 

The initial accounting for this acquisition had  previously  been  provisionally  determined.  The  necessary fair valuation  of 
consideration  and  net  assets  acquired  has  now  been  finalised  and  is  reflected  in  the  amounts  detailed  below.  This 
revaluation has resulted in  an  increase in  the  work  in progress of $8.7m, a decrease in trade  and  other receivables of 
$0.2m  and  an  increase  in  deferred  tax  liability  of  $1.7m  resulting  in  an  increase  in  the  gain  from  bargain  purchase  of 
$6.8m. 

The consideration transferred and the value of the assets and liabilities assumed at the date of acquisition are as follows: 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 85 

94  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements 
For the Year Ended 30 June 2016 

9.3.4 

Acquisition of Business – Walker Smith Way Limited (continued) 

Consideration 

Cash 
Cash settled vendor debt 
Fair value of deferred consideration (cash) 
Net present value of total consideration  

Net assets acquired 

Assets 
- Cash and cash equivalents 
- Trade and other receivables 
- Work in progress 
- Plant and equipment 
Total assets acquired 
Liabilities 
- Payables 
- Provisions 
- Deferred tax liabilities 
Total liabilities acquired 
Net assets acquired 
Gain from bargain purchase 

$’000 

5,204 
6,427 
947 
12,578 

Fair Value 
$’000 

2,174 
7,449 
28,885 
67 

38,575 

(4,313) 
(1,328) 
(4,565) 

(10,206) 

28,369 

(15,791) 

Acquisition-related  costs  for  this  acquisition  amounting  to  $nil  (30  June  2015:  $230,000)  has  been  recognised  as  an 
expense in the period, within the ‘costs associated with acquisitions’ line item in the statement of profit or loss and other 
comprehensive income. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 86 

Slater and Gordon Limited  95

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Slater and Gordon Limited 
Directors’ Declaration 

The directors declare that the financial statements and notes set out on pages 50 to 95 and the directors’ report are in 
accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 and: 

(a).  Comply  with  Accounting  Standards  and  the  Corporations  Regulations  2001,  and  other  mandatory  professional 

reporting requirements; 

(b). 

As stated in Note 1, the financial statements also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards; 

(c).  Give  a  true  and  fair  view  of  the  financial  position  of  the  consolidated  entity  as  at  30  June  2016  and  of  its 
performance  as  represented  by  the  results  of  its  operations,  changes  in  equity  and  its  cash  flows,  for  the  year 
ended on that date. 

In the directors’ opinion there are reasonable grounds to believe that: 

•  Slater and Gordon Limited will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable. 

• 

the  Company and  the  group  entities  identified in Note 6.1 will be able to meet any obligations or liabilities to which 
they are or may become subject to by virtue of the Deed of Cross Guarantee between the Company and those group 
entities pursuant to ASIC Class Order 98/1418. 

This declaration has been made after receiving the declarations required to be made by the chief executive officer and 
chief financial officer to the directors in accordance with sections 295A of the Corporations Act 2001 for the financial year 
ended 30 June 2016. 

This declaration is made in accordance with a resolution of the directors. 

John Skippen 

Chair 

Melbourne 

29 August 2016 

Andrew Grech 

Group Managing Director 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 87 

96  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Ernst & Young
8 Exhibition Street 
Melbourne  VIC  3000  Australia
GPO Box 67 Melbourne  VIC  3001

Tel: +61 3 9288 8000
Fax: +61 3 8650 7777
ey.com/au

Independent auditor's report to the members of Slater and Gordon 
Limited 

Report on the financial report 

We have audited the accompanying financial report of Slater and Gordon Limited, which comprises the 
consolidated statement of financial position as at 30 June 2016, the consolidated statement of profit or 
loss and other comprehensive income, the consolidated statement of changes in equity and the 
consolidated statement of cash flows for the year then ended, notes comprising a summary of significant 
accounting policies and other explanatory information, and the directors' declaration of the consolidated 
entity comprising the company and the entities it controlled at the year's end or from time to time during 
the financial year. 

Directors' responsibility for the financial report 

The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a true 
and fair view in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001 and for 
such internal controls as the directors determine are necessary to enable the preparation of the financial 
report that is free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. In Note 1.1, the directors 
also state, in accordance with Accounting Standard AASB 101 Presentation of Financial Statements, that 
the financial statements comply with International Financial Reporting Standards. 

Auditor's responsibility 

Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial report based on our audit. We conducted our 
audit in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. Those standards require that we comply with 
relevant ethical requirements relating to audit engagements and plan and perform the audit to obtain 
reasonable assurance about whether the financial report is free from material misstatement. 

An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in 
the financial report. The procedures selected depend on the auditor's judgement, including the 
assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the financial report, whether due to fraud or error. In 
making those risk assessments, the auditor considers internal controls relevant to the entity's 
preparation and fair presentation of the financial report in order to design audit procedures that are 
appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of 
the entity's internal controls. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies 
used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the directors, as well as evaluating the 
overall presentation of the financial report. 

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for 
our audit opinion. 

Independence 

In conducting our audit we have complied with the independence requirements of the Corporations Act 
2001.  We have given to the directors of the company a written Auditor’s Independence Declaration, a 
copy of which is included in the directors’ report.  

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited

Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

Slater and Gordon Limited  97

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
Opinion 

In our opinion: 

a.

the financial report of Slater and Gordon Limited is in accordance with the Corporations Act 
2001, including: 

i

ii

giving a true and fair view of the consolidated entity's financial position as at 30 June 2016 
and of its performance for the year ended on that date; and 

 complying with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations 2001; 
and 

b.

the financial report also complies with International Financial Reporting Standards as disclosed in 
Note 1.1. 

Report on the remuneration report 

We have audited the Remuneration Report included in pages 29 to 48 of the directors' report for the year 
ended 30 June 2016. The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation and presentation 
of the Remuneration Report in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001. Our 
responsibility is to express an opinion on the Remuneration Report, based on our audit conducted in 
accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. 

Opinion 

In our opinion, the Remuneration Report of Slater and Gordon for the year ended 30 June 2016 complies 
with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001. 

Ernst & Young 

Christopher George 
Partner 
Melbourne 
29 August 2016 

98  Slater and Gordon Limited

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited

Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Additional ASX Information 

In accordance with the Australian Stock Exchange Limited Listing Rules, the Directors provide the following information 
as at 26 August 2016. 

(a).  Distribution of shareholders and option holders. 

Holding 

1 
1,001 
5,001 
10,001 
100,001 

- 1,000 
- 5,000 
- 10,000 
- 100,000 
- Over 

Number of Ordinary Shareholders 

Performance Rights 

4,471 
8,178 
3,281 
4,001 
436 

20,367 

- 
12 
18 
15 
- 

45 

There are 3,566 shareholders holding less than a marketable parcel of 944 shares each (i.e. less than $500 per 
parcel of shares). 

(b). 

Twenty largest shareholders 

Shareholder  

HSBC Custody Nominees (Australia) Limited 

J P Morgan Nominees Australia Limited 

Citicorp Nominees Pty Limited 

Mr Andrew Grech 

Mr Ken Fowlie 

ABN AMRO Clearing Sydney Nominees Pty LTD (Custodian A/C) 

Mr Hayden Stephens 

Ms Cath Evans 

BNP Paribas Noms Pty Ltd (DRP) 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 
11 

12 

Comsec Nominees Pty Ltd 
Hishenk Pty Ltd 

Mr Patrick Thomas Bergin 

13  Writing College Australia Pty LTD 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

Mr Jake John Rutten & Mrs Dinah Ann Rutten (Jake Rutten Super) 

Mr Denis Baulsom 

Deansgate 123 LLP 

Mr Albert Wijeweera 

Joeman Holdings Pty LTD 

Mr Adrian Crisafi 

Mr Harry Hatch 

Number of 
Shares held    

     % 
Held 

16,707,261 

9,925,181 

9,045,793 

6,383,238 

5,096,221 

4,805,256 

4,255,115 

3,981,433 

3,050,441 

2,791,963 
2,700,000 

1,877,400 

1,807,591 

1,650,000 

1,575,000 

1,516,015 

1,243,091 

1,240,170 

1,232,000 

4.74 

2.82 

2.57 

1.81 

1.45 

1.36 

1.21 

1.13 

0.87 

0.79 
0.77 

0.53 

0.51 

0.47 

0.45 

0.43 

0.35 

0.35 

0.35 

1,118,888 
82,002,057 

0.32 
23.27 

(c). 

Substantial Shareholders 

A substantial shareholder is one who has a relevant interest in 5 per cent or more of the total issued shares in the 
Company.  Following  are  the  substantial  shareholders  in  the  Company  based  on  notifications  provided  to  the 
Company under the Corporations Act 2001: 

Shareholder  

None 

Number 

Ordinary Shares 
% * 

*  Percentage  of  shares  held  based  on  total  issued  capital  of  the  Company  at  the  time  a  substantial  shareholder  notice  was 
provided to the Company. 

(d). 

Voting Rights 

All issued ordinary shares carry one vote per share. 

VCR shares and performance rights do not carry any voting rights. 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 90 

Slater and Gordon Limited  99

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
Corporate Directory 

Directors 
John Skippen, Chair 
Andrew Grech, Group Managing Director 
Ian Court 
Ken Fowlie  

Erica Lane 
Rhonda O’Donnell 
James M. Millar 

Company Secretary 
Bryce Houghton 

Registered Office and 
Corporate Office 
Level 12 
485 La Trobe Street 
Melbourne Victoria 3000 
Telephone: (03) 9602 6888 
Facsimile: (03) 9600 0290 

Company Website 

Auditors 
Ernst & Young  
8 Exhibition Street 
Melbourne Victoria 3000 

Bankers 
Westpac Banking  
Corporation 
Level 7 
150 Collins Street 
Melbourne Victoria 3000 

National Australia Bank 
Level 30 
500 Bourke Street 
Melbourne Victoria 3000 

Solicitors 
Arnold Bloch Leibler 
Level 21 
333 Collins Street 

Share/Security Registers 
The Registrar 
Computershare Investor  
Services Pty Ltd 
Yarra Falls  

452 Johnston Street 
Abbotsford Victoria 3067 

GPO Box 2975 
Melbourne Victoria 3001 

Telephone 
Toll Free 1300 850 505  
(Australia) 
+61 3 9415 4000 
(Overseas) 

Investor Centre Website: 
www.computershare.com.au 

Email:  

www.slatergordon.com.au 

Melbourne Victoria 3000 

web.queries@computershare.com.au 

Company Numbers 
ACN 097 297 400 
ABN 93 097 297 400 

Securities Exchange Listing 
Slater and Gordon Limited 
shares are listed on the  
Australian Securities  
Exchange. The Home 
Exchange is Melbourne. 
ASX Code: SGH 

Slater and Gordon Limited 

Page 91 

100  Slater and Gordon Limited

Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
slatergordon.com.au